\i 



.-. '^^' 





Gass ?h^^^ 
Book .K ^% 



1S4\ 



AN 



INTRODUCTION 



TO THE 



GREEK LANGUAGE; 



ONTAINING 



AN OUTLINE OF THE GRAMMAR, V,nff 
\PPROPRIATE EXERCISES, 

*J OR THE USE OF SCHOOLS ANDTRIVATE LEARNERS. 

BY ASAHEL ii KENDRICk, 

ri oi [ssoR OF THE CiREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, IN THE 
HAMILTON LITERARY AND THEOLOGICAL INSTITUTION. 



ITICA: 

BENNETT, BACKUS, & UAWLEV, FRANKLJN SQUARi:.. 

Vr A Y(»R«, Davton &, Saxton ; Boston, Goild, Kendall, &, Lin- 

COI.N; Philadelphia, A. S. Barnes &, Co.; 

Rochester, H. Stanwood &. Co, 

1 -' 1 1 . 



^h"^. 






\ 



x^^ 



Entered according to Act of Congreser, 
By Bennett, Backus, &- Hawijjy, 

in the Clerk's Office of the Northern District of New York, 
in the year 1841. 



INTRODUCTION 



In preparing the little work which is here offered to the public, the 
author had more immediate reference to the wants of the Institution 
with which he is connected. An experience of more than ten years, as 
an instructor in the Greek language, had led him deeply to feel the need 
of some work whicli should render accessible to his own pupils, and to 
American students generally, the latest and most improved views in this 
department of Greek Philology. In no field of investigation, perhaps, 
have the last fifty years witnessed more diligent and successful labors 
than in that of tlie Greek Grammar. Many useless and cumbrous theo- 
ries have' been exploded, and much light been shed upon the structure 
and philosophy of tliis noble tongue. That the beginner in Greek should 
be able to avail himself of these improvements — tliat they should be admit- 
ted, as soon as tliey arc fuUy shown to be improvements, into our systems 
of elementary instruction, is obviously desirable. In a study so extensive 
as the Greek, and which, at best, must consume no small amount of time, 
it is important that the student be led to his object by the most direct and 
improved route. He sliould have all the aids which Uic most thorough 
Echolarsliip can afford him. The true principles of the language should 
be at once presented, in a plain and familiar manner, and he required to 
karn nothing which he will be obliged to discard at a subsequent stage 
of his progress as cumbersome and erroneous — nothing which is not tlie 
result — and will not therefore stand the test, of the most profound and 
searching investigation. 

True, no judicious instructor will endeavor to teach the philosophy of 
n language, in advance of the facts. But he will feel the importance of 
ni aking all his statements and modes of representation harmonize perfectly 
with the most enlightened philosophical views of the subject. He will, 
at all events, not present, on the ground of practical convenience, any 
instructions which he is himself aware that the student, on contemplating 
them from a higher point of view, will instantly reject as artificial, 
useless, and false. Indeed, among tlic most mischievous of the errors 
which more or less prevail in our systems of elementary instruction, is 
the separation which is so often made between what is correct in theory 
and what is convenient in practice. Wc meet, not unfrequently, in book^ 



prepared for schools, tlic remark, that sucli and such modes of exhibiting 
the subject are not indeed strictly correct in theory, but are adopted 
as being practically convenient. Statements hke this the writer believes 
to be wholly founded in mistake. One of the best tests of the correctness 
of a theory is, its susceptibility of being reduced to practice ; and that is 
unquestionably the best and soundest theory which is found most conven- 
ient and efficient in practice. The writer's own experience has certainly 
borne ample testimony to the correctness of these views. He has found 
that in proportion as his elementary instructions were thoroughly analyt- 
ical and searching, and developed in fact, if not in form, the philosophy 
of the language, his pupils have evinced the deepest interest, and made 
the most rapid progress. 

The above remarks are designed to apply more particularly to the 
Greek verb. The old mode of splitting it up into a large number of con- 
jugations, artificially distinguished, and still more of forming the tenses 
from each other by a circuitous process, has done much to embarrass the 
progress of the student, and to obscure the beauty and destroy the sym- 
metry of one of the noblest structures in the whole compass of human 
language. The writer is happy in knowing that sounder views on this 
subject are rapidly spreading, as the labors of the best German gramma- 
rians, Thiersch, Host, Buttmann, Kiihner, &c., are becoming better known 
among us. The recent Grammar of Mr. Sophocles is, in this, as in other 
respects, a valuable contribution to the cause of Greek Philology; and 
the author cherishes the hope that the time is not far distant when all the 
senseless jargon which has so long encumbered and disgraced our Gram- 
mars, in regard to the formation of the tenses, will be consigned to mer- 
ited oblivion. 

In the present work, an attempt is made to aid this object, and to assist 
American students in obtaining correct views on the leading points of 
Greek Grammar. How far the author has succeeded, a judicious public 
will judge. He would invite particular attention to his development of 
the third declension. It is, in some respects, new, and the writer indulges 
the hope that it will be found superior in simphcity and completeness to 
the methods adopted in our ordinary Grammars. The verb, also, has been 
treated with as much fullness as the nature of the work admitted. The 
subjects of the Argument, and of the nature and import of the moods 
and tenses, will, it is hoped, be found to be cleared of some difficulties 
with which they are encumbered in the ordinary mode of treatment. 
Those who object to the partially new nomenclature here adopted, will, it 
is hoped J find this no serious objection to their usTfiJ'flTe work. A half an 



bour spent in explanation to their pupils will obviate any difficulty arising- 
from this source. The author has not introduced new names of tenses 
from any spirit of innovation, but from a deep conviction that the existing 
nomenclature is extremely defective, and, in some cases, erroneous. He 
would, at least, recommend that the names Imptrfect Present and Past, 
and Perfect Present and Past^ and, in the Passive, Perfect Future should 
be substituted for the common designations of these tenses, as tending to 
give the student clear and correct impressions of their nature, and save 
much labor in the department of syntax. Special pains have been taken 
in tracing out the various meanings of the prepositions, and in rendering 
the vocabulary accurate, and as full as the hmits of the work allowed. 

The author may be permitted to say, that the leading principles of the 
Greek Grammar are here presented substantially m the manner in which 
he has for years taught them to his pupils. His custom is to go very 
slowly over the different topics as they come up, delaying upon each 
until the student is perfectly master of it. In regard to the verb, espe- 
cially, the object at which he uniformly aims, is, to give each member 
. of the class such a command of it, as that he can go through an entire 
verb, inflecting every part without mistake or hesitation. And this object 
he has generally found himself able to accomplish. Every student, of 
moderate abilities, in the course of a few weeks becomes able to give 
the inflexions of tlic verb in all its voices, moods, and tenses, in the space 
of from five to ten minutes, stating or indicating every deviation from 
the regular fonns. No exercise, to which the author subjects his pupils, 
has been found more profitable than this. They acquire by it such a 
mastery over the verb in all its narts, as greatly to facilitat'^ th<'!r subse- 
quent progress. 

It may be thought, perhaps, that the exercises in this book arc not suf- 
ficiently numerous. Many more might have been added, but even then 
but a small number could have been given in comparison with those which 
every experienced and faithful teacher will give orally to his pupils. The 
writer would recommend that every instructor should add to the exerci- 
ses here given, by taking the same words and throwing them into new 
combinations. These exercises should for a long time be of a very simple 
character, those words being chiefly employed with which the pupil is 
familiar. The use of the article, tlie adjective, the pronoun, «fcc., should 
be thus illustrated by familiar examples, and sufficiently copious on each 
head, to render the impression distinct and indelible. 

If the author may be permitted to advert to his own experience as a 
teacher in Greek, he would express his conviction that the secret of sue. 



6 

cess here is to go slowly over the elements, and attend to only one thing 
at a time. To dwell on each topic until the pupil has perfectly mas- 
tered it, is the way to make his acquisitions profitable, and his subsequent 
progress easy, rapid, and delightful. He will not then feel that the region 
he has passed over swarms with enemies no less numerous and formidable 
than those he has yet to encounter. He will not have the difficulties 
magnified by being seen through the mists of imperfect, half-formed 
ideas. On the contrary, he will contemplate with pleasure all the ground 
which he has hitherto gone over. Every victory that he has achieved 
will prove a stimulant to renewed and augmented exertion ; he wnll ad- 
vance with constantly accelerated pace, and w^ill feel, at every step, the 
toils of study repaid by the delights of perfect knowledge. Let, then, 
the teacher dismiss all anxiety to conduct his pupils, within a given 
time, over a wide surface. Let him estimate their progress, rather, by 
the depth to which they have descended — the accuracy and thorough, 
ness of their knowledge, than by the number of topics to which they have 
given a superficial attention. Let the student be content, especially in 
the commencement of his course, to hasten slowly — to dig deep, and to 
lay the foundation of his edifice on a rock. He will find his labor amply 
rewarded, not only by its firmness and durability, but by the rapidity 
with which it is reared. The writer, on this point, speaks with know- 
ledge. He has tried repeatedly the thorough method, and he has found 
it attended by results as satisfactory as they w^ere unexpected. He be- 
lievcs, firml}^ that by carrying out faithfully the principles here inculca- 
ted, a judicious teacher miglit, in the course of a single year, give his 
pupils a more extensive and radical acquaintance with the principles of 
the Greek language than is possessed by the majority of College students 
at the period of their graduation. 

In conclusion, the writer would express his ardent desire that the pre- 
sent little work may contribute to the advancement of Greek learning 
in this country. That it is faultless, he has not the vanity to suppose ; 
and, indeed, tlic examination of the sheets, as they have issued from the 
press, has suggested to him many improvements, which he would be 
happy if a second edition should give him the opportunity of making. 
The fact of its having issued from the Cambridge press, would be a suf- 
ficient guarantee for the general accuracy, neatness, and elegance of its 
execution ; and the author has taken much pains to have it go before 
the public as free from errors as possible. 

Hamilton, June 0, 1811. 



INTRODUCTION 

TO THE 

STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



§ 


1. THE ALPHABET. 


The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four 


letters, viz. 






A a 


^'AX(pa 


Jlpha a 


B li 6 


Brjra 


Beta b 


r Yf 


T'dfiua 


Gamma g hard 


J 8 


AiXja 


Delta d 


E s 


""E xpiXov 


Epsilon e short 


z t 


Zfja 


Zeta dz 


Hri 


^Hia 


Eta e long [thick 


& 6 


0)]Ta 


Theta th sharp, as in 


I I 


'laxa 


Iota i 


K X 


Kdmia 


Kappa k 


A A 


Ad/xjiSa 


Lambda I 


M ^ 


Mi 


Mu m 


N V 


Nv 


JVu n 


S 1 


St 


-Xl X 


O O 


"^O fxixgov 


Omicron o short 


n n zr 


m 


Pi p 


P 9 


'P6 


Rho r 


^ a,s final I^ly^a 


Sigma s sharp 


T xl 


Tav 


Tail t 


T V 


^TxpiXov 


Upsilon u 


(p 


01 


Phi ph 


X X 


Xl 


Chi ch 


V y, 


'Pi 


Psi ps 


SI a 


""SI fiiya 

1 


Omega o long 



10 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

€ and V were originally used both as vowels 
and as breathings, a was equivalent to our A, 
V to our / or v.^ When used as vowels they 
were called ipikd, smooth or unaspirated. The 
sound of/ or v w^as also expressed by a letter 
resembling a double gamma, (f,) hence called 
Digamma. 

§ 2. PRONUNCIATION OF THE 
LETTERS. 

1. The Consonants are generally sounded 
like the English letters placed opposite them 
in the table, y, otherwise hard, before a pala- 
tal mute (x^ y^ Xr) is sounded like ng^ as ayys- 
Xos anggeloSy ^^yx^atfg AngchiseSy ayxcov ang- 
kon, 2(pLy^ Sphinx. 

2. Vowels. € and 7f are sounded like a in 
fate ; s short as in 5f , ri long as in tiSij (delay). 

£ how^ever, in the middle of a syllable and in 
the antepenult is shortened (corripitiir) into the 
sound of e in met, as nivTs pentdy, hvTts 
etiipay. 

3. o and co are sounded like o in note, iyco, 
vTto. o before a consonant is commonly short- 
ened into in not, as koyos (logos). 

4. a, t, v, may be either short or long, hence 
called douhtful. 

♦ Of this original power of u many traces remain in the later form of the 
language. Compare ptovi with the Latin bos, bovis, and vavi with the 
Latin navis. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 11 

a long is sounded like a in father , short like 
a in fat. 

I long like i in machine^ short like i in pin. 

Note. In the antepenult these letters are 
generally sounded short. 

V always like u in tube. 

5. Diphthongs. These are formed by the 
union of the back vowels, a, e, 6, a, ?^, «, with 
the front vowels, v, t, and of these latter with 
each other. 

at^ dv^ si^ £v, 01, ovj vt. are called proper diph- 
thongs. 

dt^ av, rji, Tfv^ ot, «v, ifL, are called improper 
diphthongs. 

In d£, ?/£, o£, the t is written under (a, 17, «), 
hence called t subscript. Of the proper diph- 
thongs, 

aL is sounded like the English aij. 

av like ot^ in noWj avidg (owtar). 

ot like oi in roice. 

ov like 00 in moon, ovxoi. 

vL like the English pronoun ice. 

6. Examples. Movaa, pronounced with ov 
like 00, and a sharp, as in sin ; [.covoifg^ ov and 
(T as before, ij like long a in /a/^ (rnoosase). 
Pronounce avio?^ avTrjg^ xoviov^ zaviyjg^ avxaiy 
Tavzrjv^ Tig, xivog (tenos)^ xvnxo^ xvtzxov, ovncOj 
fisOyj^ sXsyov^ xvitxexai^ iXe^dfirfv, vtos, vloL 



12 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

§ 3. DIVISION OF THE CONSONANTS. 

1. Consonants are divided into 

a) Double consonants^ ^, equivalent to 8<j 
(pronounced soft, dz), and |, xp, for which see 
§ 4, 1. 

b) Semivowels^ A, ^^ v, g^ a, of which A, [i, r, 
p, are called liquids, and ft, r, (together with 
y sounded as ng,) are nasals. 

c) Mutes, distributed according to their 
organ of pronunciation, thus, 

lip-letters, or labials, n, /3, qo, 
palate-letters, or palatals, x, y^ /, 
tongue-letters, or Unguals, t, 5, &. 

2. These are again distinguished as unaspi- 
rated, or smooth, n, %, t • aspirated, or rough, 
(p'iX^ ^' sj^d partially aspirated, hence called 
intermediate, or middle, /3, 7, 8. 

3. The mutes then sustain to each other a 
twofold relation, thus expressed ; 

Smooth, Middle, Rough. 

Labials, n, j3, (p. 

Palatals, x, y, x^ 

Linguals, t, 8, d-. 

§ 4. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 

The following principles enter extensively 
into the inflections of the Greek language. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 13 

Especially in nouns, adjectives, and participles, 
of the third declension, and in the verb, the 
student will be required to recur to them at 
every step. 

1. Labial mutes with a {na^ ^a^fpa^) form the 
double consonant xp. 

Palatals with a (xa, ya^ %a^) form the double 
consonant |. * 

Linguals before a (icr, 5(r, d-o,) are dropped. 
Thus, 

(pXixp^ ygdxpcj. 

xogaxSj XeyacOj oVu;^g, (paXayyg^ — xdga^, Xi^o^ 
ovi;|, cpdXay^. 

/dgiig^ XafindSg^ nei&aco^ aSaco. acouaiai^ — 
xdgis^ XajXTtdg^ neioo^ aaco^ acifiaai, 

2. Labials before ft (jtfi^ (i/x^ cp/x^) become fi. 
Palatals before ft (xfi^ yfi, /^,) become y. 
Linguals before {x (t^, Sfx^ &[ji^) become er. 

Thus, 

Teivnjuat, stXifjiuaL^ ysygacpfxai^ — TiTVf.Li.iai. 
etXif/jifiai, yeygafiuat. 

nlTtXexfiai^ XiXeyfiai^ TiTv^fiaij — TtinXeyfiai^ 
XeXsyfxai, TiTvyftat. 

ifvvTfiaCy ySfiaij Ttsjtec&uai^ — i]vvafiai^ V^ff-OLt^ 
nimiOfLat. 

3. Linguals before linguals usually become 
(J, as i7ieL&-&7fv imta'&Tjv^ jjS&ijv jfo&rfv^ and 

* Except compounds with U, as f»r«^^i», not Ig^^^iw. 

1* 



14 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

before x are dropped, as Ttijtec&xa^ TtaitsLxa^ 
jfSxa Tfxa, ygnaSxa ijgjtaxa. 

4. V, ft, and y sounded as ng, are nasal, v a 
lingual, (x a labial, ;^ (ng) a palatal. Therefore 
V stands only before Unguals ; before the labials 
(|3, 71, 9?, fi^) it is changed into ft, before the 
palatals (x^ y^ Xr) i^to y. Thus, for iv^dnxco^ 
BVTtimco^ 6vv7tgd6(j(o^ avvcpri^L^ avv^oXos^ avv/ga- 
(psvs^ write ifi^dTtro^ ifiTtLmo^ dv^ngaTTco^ av^- 

5. V before g oy X is changed into the same 
letter, as ovvksyco (jvXXiyco^ avvgdmCTco avggdmo. 

6. V before a is omitted, (except in iv and (TvV, 
of which the latter is sometimes assimilated, as 
avvdiTog, avaatTog. It is also retained in a few 
other words.) as Sacfiovat 8ai(xo(jL^ fiiXavs ^liXas. 

7. V and a lingual (i/r, i/5, vd-^) before a are 
both dropped, and the preceding vowel, if 
short, is lengthened, as ndvT^i ndci^ zsTvcpav- 
rat TeTvq)d(jt^ 8blxvvvt(jl Sstxvvat. In this case 
s goes into st, and o into ov^ as Xeovrat Xiovai^ 
Tvcpd'evxai Tvcp&eLat^ ixovKjt ixovai^ TVTtxovTai 
TVTtTOvOi^ oSovTS 65oi/g, TVTtevrg Tvjtscs. 

8. Two mutes of different organs standing 
together, must be of the same degree of aspira- 
tion, as TTT, not 7t& • X7t^ not x(i • /35, not (3t. 
The first is generally accommodated to the 
second, as gdcpjco gditxco^ ixvnd^v ixvq)&rfVj 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 15 

iXsy&ijv ilix&rfv^ otcSoos o/8oog^ yga(pT6s 
yganxog. Except ix in composition, as ix&eL" 
vat, 

9. Two successive syllables do not begin 
each with an aspirate. The first therefore is 
made smooth. This rule holds especially in 
reduplication, as Ts&vxa for &i&vxa^ nscpiXyjxa 
for (pscpiXrixa^ rcdiffit for xHd'Tfi^Lt. 

Exc. a) Aor. Pass, in difv^ as itua&co&rjv. 
b) Compound words generally, as icpvcpaivo^ 

In a/co this rule applies to the rough breath- 
ing, as e/cj for !/«. 

10. A smooth mute preceding a rough 
breathing is aspirated ; thus, for inijusgog icpjj- 
fiegog. So in separate words, as dcp' ov for 
an ov. 

11. The concurrence of three consonants is 
generally avoided ; often by dropping (T, as 
iaipdXo&ai io(pd?.&ai, jervjiad'ai (xsTviitdai) xs- 
Tvcp&ai, nsnXsxa&at (nsTtke^&ai) nenle^^d^at. 

Exc. a) When the first or last of the con- 
sonants is a liquid (A, fi, v, p, y sounded as 7?^), 
as TtefKp&SLSj oxh^gog, xiy^co. b) When x or 
(S comes in composition before two consonants, 
as 8va(p&agxog^ exTixcoaigy ixxpy^co. On the other 
hand, a kindred mute is sometimes inserted 
betw^een two liquids, to smooth the pronuncia- 
tion, as dvgog drSgog, j^uarfugta {.iearf[x(3gca, 
(jLi[xXexai f,d[xji}.exai. 



16 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

12. Promiscuous examples. Let the pupil 
write properly the following words ; hvjtdTfv^ 
iXijP&TfVy STtSofiog^ ^B^XoLTtiiai^ ndvTaa^ zvTtaco, 
ivygdcpo)^ ivyi/gacpTatj ivysygacpixai^ ivysyga- 
(pdat, fV/Sf/SctTTjUa^, ivsjidTtd'rjv, iv^eLgtSLOVy aw- 
Xaix^dvOj dvvXTJ^aofiac^ (jvvXrf^&rjvac, Ts&ga- 
(pfiat^ d^s&gacpTai^ Xeyaco^ aS^a^ xpyj^tSfxa^ /3Af- 
7iovT(jt^ d'td'evTatj SidovTCtt^ dgTtddaco^ vvxtSj 

7te7toL&avT6L^ avvjtei&aai^ (pXs^oi^ ygdcpaco^ atSvau 

§ 5. BREATHINGS. 

1. Every word beginning with a vowel has 
either a smooth or rough breathing (spiiitus 
asper or lenis). The rough breathing is in- 
dicated thus ('), as dgfioviuy and answers to 
our h. Elsewhere the smooth breathing (') is 
employed, which does not perceptibly affect 
the pronunciation, as iusL 

2. In diphthongs the breathing is placed 
over the second letter, as algio^ slXov. 

3. V in the Attic dialect is always aspirated 
at the beginning of a word, as vdxtv&og^ vuo. 

4. g at the beginning of a word or syllable 
is aspirated, as g'^rcog. When g is doubled, 
the first takes the smooth breathing, the second 
the rough, as Ilvggos. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LAJ^GUAGE. 17 

^ 6. ACCENTS. 

1. One syllable in every Greek word has an 
accent, i. e. is pronounced with a slight eleva- 
tion and stress of voice, called (ngoacoSia o^sca) 
a sharp tone or accent. This syllable is indi- 
cated by this mark (') placed over the ac- 
cented syllable, as sv&vg. This is called the 
acute accent. 

2. All other syllables are said to be pro- 
nounced with the grave accent^ or falling tone 
('), which is not usually expressed. 

3. When a word, whose last syllable is ac- 
cented, stands in connexion before other words, 
the acute is softened down, and is expressed 
by the grave ; thus, ogyj) Si noXXd Sgdv dvayxd- 
tei xaxd. When therefore the student meets 
with the grave accent on the last syllable of a 
word, he will remember it is merely a softened 
acute. 

4. When two syllables, having an acute 
accent followed by a grave, are combined in 
pronunciation, their united accents make the 
circumflex ('')"", as xseTtos xijuog. 

§ 7. PLACE OF THE ACCENTS. 

1. The acute accent stands always over one 
of the last three syllables, the circumflex over 
one of the last two. 



18 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

2. The circumflex requires a long vowel or 
diphthong, as tl^oltb^ xaXov^ cpsv^Sj cpm. 

3. The acute can stand on the antepenult, 
only when the final syllable is short. The 
diphthongs at and ot at the end of words are, 
in reference to this rule, chiefly regarded as 
short, as avOgoTtoc^ TvuTsxai. The principal 
exception is the Opt. 3. Sing,^ as Ttoirjaac. 

4. When the last syllable is short, or long 
only by position, the penult, if long, takes only 
the circumflex, as p)^^a, olvos. 

5. If the final syllable is long, the penult can 
have only the acute, as p?^TC3p, olvri. 

6. Contracted final syllables generally take 
the circumflex, as dXtfOovs^ jifjia. 

7. Let the pupil accent the following words 
(the dots indicating the accented syllable), X9^' 
a, ^BTVTtTov^ avvoSos^ ""Aki^avSgos^ nagii^ stcodet^ 
dveyvco^ daxivXtov^ ixsi'vov^ 6(pgayCbd^ ngdyiid^ 
inedrixev. 

^ 8. CONTRACTIONS. 

1. These arise from the concurrence of two 
or more vowels, and take place sometimes in 
the radical part of a word, as eag^ ?/p, more 
frequently by a vowel in the termination meet- 
ing a vowel in the root, as Tft^^-og, reixovs. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 19 

2. The following are some of the usual con- 
tractions. 

a) s'C and o'C into the diphthongs st and oe, as 
TSL/ei TSi^SL^ atSoC aldoi. 

b) Two vowels into a kindred long sound, as 
€a into rjj tux^cl t€l/7j. es into sij as nous^ 
Ttoui. £0, o£, ooj into ov, as retxeos jetxovg^ 
fiLod'OS-ov. ao, aov, acj, oa, o?^, into w, as it- 
ixdcofxev Tificouev, atSoa al8(o. 

c) af, a?/, into a, as aedXos dOXog^ jifias it^ia. 
aet and ajf into a, as Ttfidec jiftd. 

d) f before or after a long sound disappears, 
€0L oLj eif tfy so Oj as cj. 

Exc. sat jfj as TVTtjeac jVTtxjf. 

e) o before and after long o sounds (a, oi^ 
ov,) disappears. 

Exc. oec and or/ become ot. 
Inf. oftv becomes oi/v, as /iiadoecv fiiaOovv. 
For exceptions to the above rules see de- 
clensions, &.C. 

§ 9. FINAL LETTERS. 

1. To datives plural in aiy and to third per- 
sons of verbs in s and i, v is added before 
words beginning with a vowel, as iv noXeoiv 
aviov^ hvipev avzov. This is called v IcpeXxv- 

OTtXOV, 

2. The preposition ex, out of, becomes l| 
before a vowel. Ov, noty becomes before a 



20 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

vowel ovx or ov/j as ov Ttdgsdriv^ ovx ednvj 

OV/ VTtSdTCV. 

3. (T is a weak letter, and easily falls away, 
H^xg^^ and [jts/gt^ ^X9^^ ^^^ ^X9h ovxcog and 
ovTo. See ^ 4. 11. § 11. 4. 6., and 2d Pers. 
Sing. Pass, of Verbs. 

4. No genuine Greek word ends in any other 
consonant than v^ g^ or <;, except ix and ovx^ 
which, however, never terminate a clause. 

Obs. Hence nouns, whose root terminates 
in any other than one of these consonants, 
always either drop this consonant, as Ttgdj^fiar, 
Ttgdyfia^ or assume another letter, usually (?, as 
XaixTrdS (XaiindSs) Xafxjtds. 

^ 10. CHARACTERS. 

1. The Greek mark of interrogation is the 
EngUsh semicolon ( ; ), as tI tovxo ; for a colon 
and semicolon a point is placed at the top of 
the line, thus tovto • xaL 

2. Apostrophe (') cuts oflf a vowel from the 
end of a word when the next begins with a 
vowel, as dn^ ^9XV^* 

3. Crasis (') is frequently employed to in- 
dicate the coalescence of vowels in different 
words, to prevent a hiatus, as to dXr^dis zdlri' 
Oeg^ xd dyadd tdyadd^ id ifid rdfid, xal iv 
xdv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 21 

§ 11. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

1. Greek nouns have three numbers, singu- 
lar, plural, and dual (denoting two) ; and five 
cases expressing different relations, as follows, 

Nom. The subject of the verb. 

Gen. Of or from^ indicating possession or 
origin. 

Dat. For or with^ remote object or instru- 
ment. 

Ace. The object of the verb. 

Voc. Used in addressing a person. 

2. There are three forms of Greek declen- 
sion, in all which one primitive form of in- 
flexion is distinctly traceable. This form is 
probably retained with least change in impure 
(and some pure) nouns of the third declen- 
sion. 

3. In the inflexion of nouns we distinguish 
two parts, the root and the termination. A 
termination can be in no other consonant than 
V, p, or a (^ 9. 4). The roots, to which they 
are appended, may have every variety of ter- 
mination. They may end in either of the fol- 
lowing letters, mutes, n, /3, 9), x, y, ;^, t, 5, 6, 
liquids^ A, ^u, v, p, vowels, a, £, j^, t, o, v, a. 

4. The general termination of the nomina- 
tive is (7- this being a weak letter (^ 9. 3) it 

2 



22 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

is frequently dropped. This is especially the 
case with feminine nouns of the first declen- 
sion^ and neuters of the second and third. 

5. All the consonant roots (mutes and li- 
quids) w^ith the roots in e, t, v, belong to the 
third declension, those in a and ij to the first, 
those in o and a chiefly to the second. The 
following table presents the usual forms. 



I t I I I II I I ' > ' 
o ooooo oo ccooo 

^O "^C ^o ^o ^O ^O ""O ^o ^o ^o ^c ^o ^o 



R*x'~N /"- V 5 S * ^ '^ a 

to totototo-o Sto istoistoto 

i;i i;^ -^ "Si *;=) i?> vg vj^j -> ?5 =i -;s "?i 

o ooooo oo ooooo 

o<.55 «oO wotoS^ 

"S "S "S "S "5S '^S "S^S "5S"2"S'^S ^ 

Si. ^ S 

O^S wo ^c^^ssoT 

II I . *o 



VI 



.. ... ... ' ' ^ ^ 'S ^s 

r< r< '^ 



o 'S "I 'S ^S ^5 "I '5 ^5 'S ^S ]g 'S ^S 



C O^^ wo wotoSw 

^ f^O ?0 ^O ^O ^O aO ?;Ono Xo^OaOaOaO 

cc ;?' 6 Q < > C; 1? d S^ 15 d ft < > 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



23 



7. The principal irregularities in ko/og and 
fiovaa arise, it is perceived, from the rejection 
of the weak consonant a (§ 9. 3), and then 
making contractions more or less irregular, 
liovaasg ^ovaae fxovaaLj loyoes Xoyos Xoyoi^ 
Xoyoog Xoyoo Xoyov. 

8. The original termination of the Ace. Sing, 
seems to have been in v. After a consonant it 
was changed, by a law which prevailed exten- 
sively in the Greek language, into a. a being 
once adopted became the common termination, 
and the ending in v was restricted to a few 
classes of pure names. Analogous changes are 
seen in the 3 plur. Perf. Pass., as TSTgdcpaxat 
for Tsiganvxai^ and icpOdgaraL for IcpdaQvxat. 
And the Ionic dialect abounds in forms like the 
following, TiSTtavarat for neTzavviai^ nvOotaTO 
for nvdoivTo^ xsxXiaxai for xixXcvxai^ Seonoxea 
for deajioxTfv* 

§ 12. THE ARTICLE. 





Singular. 






Dual. 




Plural. 




31. 


F. 


N. 




M. F. N. 


M. 


F. N.^ 


N. 
G. 


6 

TOV 


c 


TO 
lOV 


A. ' 


> , , , 

► TO) TU ia» 

1 




al T«, the 
Twv Ttuv, of the 


D. 
A. 


TW 

tor 




TW 
TO 


G.J 
D.J 


xdlv xuiv Toiv 


Tolg 
Tovg 


Toig lolg, to the 
Ttig Tii, the. 



♦ See this subject treated by Hupfeld, Jahn's YahrbUcher, Vol. IX. 
(1829,) p. 472. 



24 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



^ 13. FIRST DECLENSION. 

Characteristic vowel a, and, in the singular, ij. 
The masculine adds ?, thus making four ter- 
minations, a, ?/, feminine, a?, ?^?, masculine. 

1. Terminations. 

Sing, 
G. D. A. V. 

rig // av a. So do^a, gIo7y, yXwooa, a tongue, 
-Oakaaaaj a sea. 
a (pure) dg a dv «. So qpd/a. friendship, OTcid, a sha- 
dow, olyda, a house, 

gag qa gav ga. So S^vga, a doo?', ^fisga, U day. 
X^Qoi, a region, 

V? V ^^ ^ ^^ lvnr]y grief, rifii], honor, ipvxri, 
a soul, cpan'T], a voice- 

ov a av a So vsavicxg, a youthy Tcc^iagf a stew- 
ard , JUv&ayogag. 

ov ]] r^v a* So 7ioiriT7]gj a poet, Xr^oTrjCy a rob- 
ber, Tildvrig, a tax-gatherer. 

Dual, 
a aiv ciiv d a. 

Plural, 
(XI wv aig dg at. 

Examples, 

71 d6$a, glory. ^ ti^tJ, honor, 6 noXhrig, the 6 VBavlag, the 

citizen, youth. 



N. 
a 



ga 

ag 

Tjg 



Sing. 
N. do^a 
G. do^rjg 
D. d6^rj 
A. do^av 
V. d6^a 



Si7ig, 
N. t/^utJ 
G. Tifirjg 
D. Tlfifj 
A. Tll^7]V 

V. Ti^rj 



citizen, 
S!ng. 
N. TioliTrjg 
G. noVnov 

D. TlollTI] 

A. nollTT^v 
V. TtoXlja 



yoi 
Sing. 
N. vearlag 
G, vsarlov 
D. vsavla 
A. %'savlav 
y, vsavla 



* Nouns in /^w?, and a few others, make the Vocative Singular in »j, as 
*Ar^ti}*is* Ai^ffrm makes n or a. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 25 

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual 

N. A. V. do^a N. A. V. Tifici N. A. V. TioA/ra N.A. V. r^avia 
G. D. do^aiv G. D. Tiuuiv G. D. noUiaiv G. D. veavlaiv 

Plural. Plural. Plural. Plural. 

N. do^ai N. T/^a/ N. tioXltul N. rectrlai 

G. ^o|wv G. Tifxcjv G. noXiTwv G. >'6av/ojv 

D. (5d^a/^ D. Tifialg D. TioXliaig D. rsarlaig 

A. 5o^«^ A. Tiuag A. noX'nug A. rear lag 

V. 5o|ai V. T///afc V. TToATrat V. viaviui. 

^ 14. EXERCISES ON THE FIRST 
DECLExXSION. 

1. English into Greek. 

77iW5^. 7%^ muses. Of the muses. The house. 
The house of the muses. The friendship of the 
muses. The honor of the house. Grief (?) Xvmf). 
The grief of the youth. The soul of the poet. 
The voice of honor. The door of the house. 
Doors of houses. The voices of the poets. The 
voice of friendship. Of the voices of friendship. 
With the tongues (jatg yXoaaaLg) of the poets. 
Of the shadow of the house. Of the shadows of 
the houses. 

Remark 1. The genitive is often placed 
between the noun and article on which it is 
dependent ; thus, i] jijg oixiag axed, the shadow 
of the house ; ff ujg Xvin^s aii/a, the cause of 
grief. 

Rem. 2. With abstract nouns, as names of 
virtues, vices, &c., the article is employed or 

2* 



26 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

omitted at pleasure ; as drunkenness^ ^ [iidtf or 
[xidtf, friendship, r] (piXia or (ptXca. 

2. Greek into English. 

a and tf. 

"^ H dvga Ttjs olxiag. Trjg cpov^s rSv MovaSv. 
^HjTJg xpv/rjg iTttfxiXsia. "^ H dyaTtrf r^g Tturjg. 
^H etgjjvrfg ipcovij. ^ II ^orj r^g yjv^^g. At axtat 
Tcov vecpsXcov. ^o^ac xal ijCLdv^iai xal 'j^SovaL 
^ H dgsTrjg -^Sovij. "^ H dg/rj ^orjg. Hrf^rj irjg 
aocpiag. At oixiai Trig ^^P/^* ^^ xSfiat Trjg 
^cogag. At x^9^^ ^V^ 7^^* H xo^iri Trjg xscpa- 
Xrjg. Tj} (pcovjf cr]g ^govTrjg. Trjg yecpvgag xai 
Trjg daXdaarfg. 

a? and rjg. 

^O SeOTtoTrfg Trjg otxiag. ^ H vixrf tSv Hsgcfcov. 
Ol vavTUt Trjg OaXdcjdijg. '^ H xagSta tov Ttgo- 
SoTov. ^ H xXsTtTOv aiyij. Ol OTguTicoTai tov 
MiXTidSov. Toiv Ilvdayogov [laOrfTov. "^ H 
ATgstdSv 6g}^ri. "^ H dkxrj tov vsaviov. ^ H gci- 
fxrf tSv ddXijT^v. '^ H dxTrj BaXd^aiig. "^ H vsa- 
viov TtaiSeia. 

Remark. The Greeks frequently omit the 
article, where the English idiom requires it, 
provided its omission creates no obscurity ; 
thus, the country of the king, ^ X^9^ ^^^ (iaai- 
Xiog^ or rj %(oga jiaatAsog^ or r/ jSaatXscog x^ga, 
Tj xkijtTov aiyriy the silence of the thief or of a 
thief 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 27 

§ 15. 'ErSl and ZT. 

Sing. Sing, 

N. f/cJ, I N. QVy thou 

G. f^ov or ^ovy of me G. oovy of thee 

D. f/iofc or ^o'h to ox for me D. aol, to ox for thee 

A. ifii or ^f, mc A. at, /Ace 

N. A. ywif, rol, 2^?6 /iTO N. A. ac^pcu/, agpo;, yo// txco [ttco 

G. D. ywlV, rJiV, of or /o MS two G. D. ocpcjir, ucfot), if OX to you 

Plural Plural 

N. riuugy we N. I'/ifT?, you 

G. ^/iwv, q/'ws G. I'utur, of you 

D. ^/xTv, /o ox for us D. i/iTy, /o y«M 

A. i7^a^, MS A. vfAugt you. 

Exercises. 
1. English into Greek. 

Of me. Forme. Me. Of us. To vs. We. 
Us. Thou. You. Of thee. Of you. We 
two. You two. The house of me (my house). 
The head of thee (thy head), ?) xscpakij aov. 
Thy voice. My heart (xagSia). Of my life. 
Of our lives. Our region. Of our houses. Of 
my houses. 

2. Greek into English. 

^HyX^atsd fiov. Al yXtoaoai yucov. ^HinC' 
Ovfua rffg xagStas fiov. 'O SeoTtoufs jtJs ^cigas 
'^ficov. Ot Seanoiac i]u(ov. ' H ySovij zyg (pikias 
cfov. ^ H yagd Trjg ipvxyjs [lov. 'O fiadifTils aov. 
'H dg/if Ti]g ^cojjs fcov. 



28 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Examples with sivaty to be (see § 61), and 
Prepositions (^ 75). 

^EaxL (there is) dvga iv rf} olxta. ""H (xidrf 
fiavia iariv, "^ H aydnri rrjg slgijvrjs iaxiv iv tj} 
xagSta fiov. "^ H Xvnri iarlv iv xagdtai? v^Sv. 
Ovx ix Ttsviag iarl XvTtri aAA' i^ intdv^iag, '^ H 
(ptXagyvgca iarl gtta Trjg xaxia?. ^Ex rrjg age- 
Trig i^^f^^ avSai^ovla. ' H dgsTrj xal i) docpicL 
l^oi] Trjg ywxrjg idTLv. *^0 xXsTtTrjg iaxlv iv tjjI 
otxia. ^jfiT (pcXta idTi nriyri '^Sovijg. ' H (jxrfv^ 
fiov i(jTi Ttagd ir^v ddXaaaav. ^Ev Tjf ivToXjj aov 
iciTt xagd [.lov. 

Remark 1. Our indefinite article is indicated 
in Greek by the absence of the article ; as, 
dvga, a door. 

2. In Greek the predicate generally omits 
the article ; as, ^ r^iiga vv^ iysvsTo, the day 
became night ; if vv^ '^aiga iyevsTo, the night 
became day ; rf fxeOtf ^lavia ioTtv. But if the 
predicate is more limited than the subject, it 
may take the article ; as, ^Itfaovg r^v 6 vtog tov 
0eov, Jesus was the son of God, (it being sup- 
posed there was but one son of God.) 

3. In Greek, as in Latin, two singular nouns 
united by the conjunction xac, (and,) take a 
verb either in the singular or plural; as, TLfi?} 
xal dgsTij iaxLv or doiv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 29 

§ 16. CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST 
DECLENSION. 

""Egea igd, igiag igds^ igia iga, igeav igdv, 
&c. 

Takeif yaXrjj yaXerig y^aXijs, yoL^ii} yaXjf^ &c. 

§ 17. SECOND DECLENSION. 

1. Characteristic vowel o, lengthened by the 
Attics in some words into a. The nominative 
attaches s for the masculine, v for the neuter; 
hence og and ag, masculine, (sometimes feaii- 
nine,) ov and cov neuter. 

2. Singular. / 

6 (speech) to (work) 6 (temple) to (hall) 



N. 16 yog 


iQyoy 


vnig 


aroryecoy 


G. Xcyov 


I'^yov 


vid 


arb)yfOi 


D. A 0/0) 


i'^y(o 


ff&J 


atwyeoj 


A. Xoyov 


iQyov 


yfoiV 


arojyfojy 


V. X6ye 


fgyoy 

Dual 


vhwg 


uiwyttny 


N.A.V. ;io>a) 


igyo) 


yfoJ 


UYOtyHi) 


G. D. Xoyoiv 


egyoLv 

Plural. 


YiO)V 

* 


avojyioiy 


N. X6yoi. 


tgya 


Vfti 


avcjyita 


G. Xoyatv 


fQytay 


ymy 


avwyfwy 


D. Xoyotg 


iQyoig 


vftag 


arwyfojg 


A. Xoyovg 


Xqya 


veojg 


avbjyibj 


V. Ao>oi 


Xgya 


ym 


arwyfcj. 



So xoafiog, world, ay&g(onog, man, ^sog, God^ ilXiog, sun, 
filog, life, 6(f>&aXfi6g, eye, vlog, son, yofiog, law, nXoviog, wealth, 
d(SQOv, gift, divdQor, tree, (fvXXov, leaf, mdlov, plain, fihgoy, 
measure, JaJor, animal, jixrov, child, liyyeXog, messenger, no- 
TOfiog, river, noXffiog, war. 



30 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. Exercises on the Second Declension. 

a) j1 word. Of a word. With a word 
(^oycp). The word. Of the loords. The word 
of God. The toords of the man. The loorks of 
God. The life of man. The leaves of the trees. 
A leaf of a tree. The leaves of a tree. Of the 
leaves of the trees. Of the trees of the forest 
{vhf). The eye of the man. The ways (f] 6S6s) 
of the rivers. 

b) The sun is the eye of the world. Man is 
an animal. The law of the Lord is in my heart. 
Thou art the son of God. Wealth is a gift of 
God. There is {aaii) a tree near the river. 
The eye of the Lord (xvQcog) is upon the earth. 
The voice of the Lord is in the earth. The sun 
is in the clouds (vecpikri). The sun is thy mes- 
senger. The river of death (Odvajos). The 
leaves of the tree of life (^(orj). The river of life 
is from (Ix, out of) the throne (dgovos) of God. 

4. Greek into English. 

"^O v6(ios Tov dsov. ^O Xoyog stSoXov iaxi 
T^s rpv^^rjg. " H AiyvTCTOs Sqqov iaxc tov Net- 
Xov. Ilagd zocs AtyvnxioLS 6 tJXios xal ?) asXrj- 
vtf deoL doLv. ^Ev olq^V r(v 6 Xoyos xal b }.6yos 
riv Ttagd ra deS. Td nXold [xov iv tj} OaXdaatf 
ioTLv. '^O vTtvos liSTLV dSsXcpos TOV Oavdzov. 
Olvos eajL xdjonxgov tov vov. 01 dve^oi xal 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



31 



rf ddXaaaa SovXot eicfcv avBgconcov. ""Eyo st^u 
SiSdaxaXos, av [ladrjT-^s* ""Ev otvco iailv dXi\dsLa. 
*^0 (p66og Tov Kvgiov iailv dgj^ii] t7^s aocptag. 
*0 X9^^^^^ ioTiv ogyrjg (pdgfiaxov. ^Ev tj} 2^1X8- 
Xia iailv ^^(pgoSiTrfs vecog. 

§ 18. CONTRACTS. 

N. voog (mind) vovSj G. voov vov, D. vocp vco^ 
A. voov vovvj V. vos vov. Dual, voco vciy vooiv 
voiv. PL vooL voT^ voov vov, vooig vols, &lc. 

""OoTBov oOTOvv (boiie), oajBov oarov, oaieep 
ooTw, oazeov oaxovv. Dual, oaiico 6ot6, oaxioLv 
OOTOLV. PL ooiia oaxd^ oaiicov ootcov, &:c. 



§ 19. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 
IN 02:, H, ON. 

1. These have in the Feminine the termina- 
tions of the first declension (a or rf), in the 
Masculine and Neuter those of the second 
(09, ov). 



Singular, 

N. ao(jp-oV, tJ, 6v 
G. ao<jp-oi;, ^^, ov 
D. aoqr-w, ij, (u 
A. ooq-6vj i]Vy ov 
V. aoQp-i, tJ, ov 



^o(fog, wise. 

Dual. 
N.A.V. (jo<jp-oi, a, (J 
G. D. oo(p'o2vf «!>', 
[olv 



Plural. 
N. ao(p-oi, uiy a 
G. ao<f-oir, wv, wv 
D. aoff-olg^ uiQt olg 
A. oocp-ovc, «V» a 

V. O0(f-0lf ul, u. 



2. Adjectives in og pure, and gog, make the 
Feminine in a ; as, cplkLog, a, ov • fuxgog, a, oj/. 



32 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



Singular, 
N. <jp/At-oc, a, ov 
G. q>iXi-ov, (xg, ov 

D. CplXl-My (X, CO 

A. (plXi-or, av, ov 
V. q)ikL-e, «, ov 



^ilhog, friendly. 

Dual. 
N.A.V. q)iXl-(Oy a, ft) 
G. D. (fiXl-oLV, aiVy 
[on' 



N. Qplh-oL, aiy a 
G. (piXl-cov, G)v, a)v 
D. (fdl-oigy aig, oig 
A. q)iXl-ovgy (xgy a 
V. q>lXL-oiy aiy a, 

Exc. Adjectives in oo? make ?/ in the femi- 
nine ; and adjectives in eog and oog are con- 
tracted ; as, )(gvaso9 ^gvaovg, xgvasa XQ'^^V^ 
j^gvaeov %gvaovv • anXoos anXovg, anlorf azrAi^, 
auXoov dnXovVj &c. 

3. Compound adjectives, and many others in 
og, have but two endings, and belong exclu- 
sively to the second declension. 

A&dvaTog, immortal. 
Singular, Plural, 

N. 17 a&draiog, to oc&dvaTOV N. ol al d&dvaioLf rd a&dvata 

G. Tov rrjg tov d&avdxov G. xojv tmv tojv a&avaKdV 

D. TO) T)J Tw d&avdio) D. TOf? Tttl^ To7^ d&avdioig 

A. TOV Tijv TO a&dvaiov A. tov? tw? t« ad^draia 

V. a&dvars, a&dvottov V. ad^dvaroi, addvaxa. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. Tw Ta Tw oc&avdrco 
G. D. ToTi' Ttttv ToI>' ad^avdzoLV, 

^ 20. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES 
IN O^. 

1. Adjectives in og, ?/, oi/, anrf og, a, 01/. '^ya- 
dog (piXog. 2o(pdg avdgconog. *^0 xaXog xodfiog. 
"^O XafjiTZgog ijXcog. T6v d/adSv cpiXcov. Ol ni- 



II 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 33 

cnrot SovXoL. OvijTd ^Sa. Maxgd 686s. Mixgd 
Tgdna^a. IIXovtos oXiyog. Ilvkrj (^tsvtJ. Abv- 
xai nsTgai. Aidos ^eaios. Aocpos x^Xsnos. 

Orjaavgos ionv 6 Tttaios (piXos. *^0 aocpos 
oivdgcoTtos iazL [xaxdgtog. * O xatgog vfxcov iaxcv 
dst azoifiog, Kaxog (iiog iailv ovSivtoTS fiaxdr- 
giog. "JSaiLv iv xcofitf ^fx^v^txaazrjg (pgovtfiog. 
"^O Ui^yaaog innog -qv nrrfvog. Ilvdayogag r^v 
XTLOTJjg jrjg (piXooocpiag Trig I^^OLXixiig. '^H fxedrj 
fiixgd fiavia itjiiv. "^ H 68dg stg ^^AlSov edxl nav- 
Ta^ov o^oia. "^ H dgsi^g odog to TtgaTov (at 
first) x^^^^V ^^^^'^9 vcnegov 8i ga8La. '^H /«pa 
l;ff^ (has) LxavTJv cpvXaxijv. Zcoyjg jtovrfgag ts- 
XevTrj ioTL OdvaTog novrfgog. ^ SI maTTj xpv/rj ! 

2. Adjectives in og of two endings. 'O nXov-^ 
Tog ioTL OvrjTogj tf 86^a dddvuTog. *^0 dvfiog 
dXoyLOTog. AslXov 6 itXovTog xai cpiXoxpvxov 
xaxov. Avxco xai iTtTto avvvo^co ioTov. KaXov 
ri dXijOsia xai ^xovifiov. "^ H 2JLX8XLa idTl vrjaog 
noXvdvdgcoTtog. ^O Oeog ioTcv dyewTfTog. Ov- 
8ev ioTL l3ej3aiov iv tS /3/« tS dvOgconivco. 

Remarks. 1. When the noun is accompanied 
by an article, the adjective is placed between 
the article and noun, as, 6 dyadog dvOgonoSy 
the good many or follows both, with the article 
repeated, as, 6 dvOgonog 6 dyadog. "^O dvOgo- 
nog dyadog^ or dyadog o dvdgoTtog^ could only 
be read with ioTt understood, the man is good. 
^£7toc7j(ja Tijy otxiav t?^i/ xaXriv^ or iTtoirfda t?^V 
3 



34 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

TcaXijv oLXLUv, I made the beautiful house ; but 
iTtoirfda Tijv otxcav xaXrjvy I made (i. e. render- 
ed) the house beautiful. 

2. So the possessive pronouns 1^16?, minCj 
doSj thine^ vfihsgo?, yours , &c. ; as, 6 ifjtos Sov" 
Ao?, or 6 dovXog 6 ifjios, a more emphatic form 
for 6 SovXos fiov^ my servant. ^O aos vovs to aov 
aSfia [iSTaxetgi^sTai, thy mind controls thy body. 

3. The verb etvac is often omitted ; as, 6 dv- 
[los {ioTiv) aXoyLOTos. The adjective is often 
put in the neuter, agreeing v^ith a noun under- 
stood ; as, 71 ivgavvig aq)aXsg6v iaxt^ supreme 

^power is a dangerous thing {X9W^)' 

§2K ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 
IN 02:, H, O. 

The adjectives aXXos^ Toiovjosy joaovTog^ and 
TTflixovToSy and the pronouns 6V, avios^ ixuvosy 
ovTosj have the Nom. Neut. Sing, in o. Thus, 

akXog, another. 

Singular, Dual, Plural, 

N. all-og, r}y o 
G. all-ov, rig, ov 
D. Slk-cOf f], ft) 
A. akX-OP, riv, o 



N.A.V. akX-00, a, ft) I N. alX-oL, at, a 
G, D. aXX~OiVy aiVylG. akX-cov, (or, cov 



D. uXX-oig, aig, oig 
A. iiXX-ovg, ag, a. 



[0 

So avtog, ipse, self, izuvog, ille, he, og, who, 

^ 22. EXERCISES ON 'AAA02:. 

1. "AXlog without the article means in the 
sing, another, in the plural, others. 



I 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 35 

2. With the article, it means in the singular, 
the remaining part^ in the plural, ot aXXoiy the 
rest (ceteri). 

3. The other, in the singular, 6 srsgos. 

4. Examples. ''AXXri x^9^^ another country; 
71 higa /«pa, the other country ; -q aXXtf xcoga, 
the rest of the country ; aXXai xSgaij other coun- 
tries (some others) ; at aXXai x^Q^h the rest of 
the countries. ^' AXXo SivSgov, another tree ; to 
iiXXo SevSgov, the rest of the tree ; to hsgov 
SivSgoVy the other tree; oiXXa SivSga, other trees; 
xd aAAa SivSga^ the rest of the trees. So, a day 
(fffiiga)^ another day^ the other day^ the rest of 
the day^ the rest of the days, other days. 

So otxia^ a house^ aygos, a field. 

% 23. 'ATTOi:. 

1. AvTos with the article means always the 
same (idem) ; as, 6 aviog Tonos, the same place ; 
iv tS avv6 TOTtcpj in the same place ; xd avid 
Ttgd/fiazaj the same things ; t6v avzov Ttga/fid- 
Tcjv, of the same things. 

2. Aviog without the article, in the nomina- 
tive always, and in the oblique cases when fol- 
lowed by a noun, signifies self (ipse) ; as, avrog 
iyco, I myself ; avrog (prjfiCy I myself assert ; av- 
Tos 6 dvdgconog^ the man himself; rov dvdgcjnov 
avTov^ or avjov rov dvdgconov^ of the mail him- 
self 



» 



« 



36 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. Standing alone in the oblique cases, it is 
the demonstrative pronoun him^ her^ it ; as, o 
deos ycal rd igya avjov^ God and the works of 
him {his works) ; o xodfios xal rd iv avrw, the 
world and the things in it ; iv avx^ -qv ^orj, in 
him was life. 

§ 24. 'OTTO 2 and 'EKEIN02. 

1. ^Eyiuvo<; (from Ix^r, there)^ signifies that \ 
person there ^ he (ille). 1 

2. O^Tog (from 6 and ocvTo'g,) signifies this 
(hic)^ this person^ and follows in its inflexion 
the article. 

Singular, Plural, 

N. ovjog, aiiir}, tovio N. ovtoi, OLVxcti, xavia 

G TOVTOVy TOiVTTjg, TOVTOV G. TOVTCOV, TOVZCOV, TOVTOJV 

D. TOVTCOf TaVTT], TOVTCO D» TOVTOig, TCXVTaigy TOVTOig 

A. TOVTOV, Tavtrjv, tovto A. Tovxovg, Taiixag, xavza 

Dual. 

N. A. TOVTU), TaiJia, TOVIOI 

G. D. TOVTOiv, Tavzaiv, toviolv, 

3. Odios and ixetvos stand either before both 
the substantive and its article, or after both ; 
as, ovTos 6 avdgcoTtos^ this man ; rcov dvdganov 
TovTcoVy of these men ; iv ixsivzf rj} rjfiigcCy in that 
day ; [isid tjjv Sgav ixetvrfv^ after that hour. 

§ 25. EXERCISES ON 'AAAOi:, 'AT^ 
T02,' OTTOZ, &LC. 

Msxd Tov ddvarov ^/xav icjitv rificv ciXXog ^tog. 
Maxdgiog icfztv 6 SovXos ixetvos. '^ H (SaatXeta 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 37 

7/ ii^n} ovx e(jTiv ix tov x6(jfxov tovtov. Ilagd 
TavTTfv T?^V x^gav iaxlv 6 noxa^os. Tovto iaiiv 
6 vofiog xal ol ngocpijiat. Ol aXXoi aTgaTtSzat 
Tfiav iv Tco avTco totcco. Tavrd iartv dyadd. 
Td SSga rvfi Tv%rj9 iatl atpaXsgd, xal avirj iaxt 
TvcpXrj xal xocprj. 'O SiSdaxaXos aviog xal ol 
[xadjfTal avTOv r/aav iv jfj avirf axod. 'Eyco e^co 
(have) TTJv avzi}v yvafirjv col (the same senti- 
ment with thee; 6 avios, the same^ takes the 
Dative after it, as in Lat. idem the Ablative 
with cum). 

§ 26. THIRD DECLENSION.* 

1. The third declension has as radical letters, 
to which its terminations are attached (see 
^11), the mutes n, x, t, ^, y, 8, cp, /, 0, the li- 
quids A, V, p, and the vowels s, i^ v, o. Roots in 
a belong to the first declension, roots in o to 
the second, except a few which, in the singu- 
lar, follow the third. 

2. The Nominative regularly assumes a. The 
Hquids, however, do not generally take it, and 
many of the mutes (especially neuter roots in 
t), instead of attaching a and dropping the t, 
omit both ; thus, root ngdyfxax^ Nom. ngd/fxa 
(reg. Ttgdyfiag), root [xeltTy N. {xeXt (reg. fii?ug)j 
Roots in ovT (reg. oris, ovg, as bSovr, oSovg) 



* Before commeDcing this declension, the student should make himself 
perfectly familiar with the principles, in §§ 3 and 4. 

3* 



38 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

generally drop the t and make the Nominative 
in ov ; as, Xsovr^ Xecav. So all participles in (ov. 

3. The student, then, will be careful not to 
confound the nominative with the root, in de- 
ciding to what class a noun belongs ; e. g. 
Ttgay^a and most nouns in a have a root in a 
mute consonant ; many nouns in cov^ a root in 
ovx ; some a root in oi/, as SaLfjiov, root SaT^ov. 
The first object should always be, to ascertain 
the root (which may be found from either of 
the oblique cases except the Voc. Sing, and 
Dat. Plur.), as the terminations are directly 
attached to this. 

4. MUTE NOUNS. 

Root, [jj) kcxfindd (jo) TTQocy^aT {o) xogax [o) odovT 

Sing. 

N. Iaix7id{d)-g 7iQd/fxa{T) xJ^«x-?(xo^a|)o<5oiV 

G. Xafj,7idd-og T[gdy(,iaT-og xogayc-og odovr-og 

D. Xafxndd-L itQityiiaT-i xd^ax-t odovr-i 

A. hxfiTi(id-ci Tigd/fia aoQtxH-a cdovj-a 

V. "ka^ndg ngd/ixa xoga^ odovg 

Dual 

N.A.V.>L«^7r«5-« TiQay^aT-s y.oQCuc-s odovr-s 

G. D. Xa^nd8-oiv TtQity^dx-oiv ^oqaK-oiv o86vt-oiv 

Plur. 

N. la^ndd-eg nQdy^uT-ci noQax-sg odovj-sg 

G. XafiTidd-cov ngccyfidT-wv xogay.-wv odon-biv 

D. Xa^i7id{d)-ai 7igdyjxoc{T)-aL noga^L od6i'T{65ov)-aL 

A. Xa^ndd-ag ngdyfiax-oi xoguic-otg odovi-ag 

V. l(x^7idd-eg ngdy^ax-a xogctx-eg odori-sg. 

5. Roots in tr, id, tO, vd, with the acute ac- 
cent on the penult, have the Ace. Sing, both in 
a and v ; as, x^gi? (x^Q^'^)^ ;^ap6Ta, and xcigtv • 
xogvs {yc6gvd\ xogvda, and xogvv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 39 

6. The student will easily explain the changes 
in Mute Nouns (as, oSovs from oSovtj vv^ from 
vi/xt), by recurring to the general principles in 
§ 4. Many roots, however, make their nom- 
inative entirely irregularly ; as, i)'5aT (reg. Nom. 
vSas), v8og^ vdaros^ &c. ; /oVar, kiiee^ (^^g* 
Nom. yovag^) yovv, yovaxos • yvvaix^ icoman^ 
(reg. Nom. ywai^^) yvvjj^ yvvacxos, Voc. yvvat • 
yocAaxr, milk^ (^^g- Nom. ;^aAa|,) ;^aAa, yaXa- 
xTos • 7]7iaTj N. 7)7cag. 

7. The vocative sometimes throws off a ; as, 
Ttatg (root TratS), V. jtai. Many nouns in vt 
flrop the T and make the vocative in v ; as, 
AlavT (N. Aias)^ Voc. ^lav. Some proper 
nouns drop also the v ; as, "AtXolvt (N. "^- 
zAa^), Voc. 'Axkd. 

^ 27. LIQUID NOUNS. 

1. Root, (o) dulfioy (o) y/op (o) fiiXav {6)"EXXrjv (6) najiq 

Sing. 

N. dnifiwv ipfig iAiXn{y)~g "eIXtjv nairiQ {^iQoq 

G. datfior~og ipttQ-og ^iXnr-og *'hXXriv-oq naiiq-oq, na- 

D. daifjLOV'i tfjftQ-i ^hXnv-i "KXXf]v-i. 7taii()-iy naiqi 

A. ditifiov-a i^d(j-a fitXay-u ^'JiXXr^v-a nartfj-it 

V. dalfiov ipufj fiiXag *'£XXr^v niiify 

Dual. 

N.A.y.dixiuov-E Iijuij-F uiXitv-e "EXXriv- e TtaTtg-s 

G. D. daifAoy-niv ipuQ-o7f /jfXiiv-oiv 'j^XXi]v-otv 7iaii{}-oi9^ 

Plur. 

N. duf^oi'-fg ipuQ-fg /utXur-(g "LXXrii-sg nnTi{}-hg 

G. 8(tiu6i'-uiy ipito-uiv fif^Xtn-wv 'jUXrfr-b)V nocTi(j-oiv 

D. diiluo{i) at kpito-oi fnXft[r)-oi"jCXXri-ai noLitju-m 

A. 8ui^0'-nQ (^>ao-ftg ^uiXitv-ug 'jlXXr^v-ag mtrtQ-itg 

V. duifiov-fg ipufj-fg fitXity-sg 'LXX^v-ig naiffj-^g. 



40 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Like nairiQy father, are declined fn^TrjQf mother, d^vyaxriQy 
daughter, yaoti^g, stomach, except Dat. PL yaoxriqai, "^Avi^g, 
a man, (root, avsg^) syncopates £ and inserts d to smooth the 
pronunciation ; as, avi^g, G. avsgog, avgog avdgog, D. avigt, 
avdgl, Ace. aviga Svdgot, &c., Dat. PI. avdgdav, 

2. Remarks on Liquid JYouns. As Liquid 
Nouns do not commonly add a in the nomina- 
tive, they frequently lengthen the radical vowel 
as above. So not^ev^ nocfji^v • ^rjiog^ 9^^^§' 
Neuters retain the short vowel ; as, i^rog, ^Vo- 
gos. Some are already long; as, "EXXriv-os^ 
alcoP'Os. 

3. There are no roots in ^, and but one in 
A, viz. aXs (root aA), the sea. > 

4. The vocative is usually like the root. 

§28. PURE NOUNS. 

1. These suffer many contractions by the 
contact of the vowel of the ending with that of 
the root, and are otherwise more changed than 
nouns with mute and Hquid roots. Few of 
them, however, are contracted in all the cases 
which admit contraction. Pure roots end in f, ^ 
4, 0, V, a few in w, and three or four in a. 

2. They generally attach a for the Nomina- 
tive. 

3. Roots in s. 

These lengthen s into r/ in the nominative of 
mascuhne and feminine nouns. In neuters, s is ' 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



41 



changed into the stronger o, except in neuter 
adjectives, which retain s. They contract most 
of their obhque cases. 



Root, 


Tgir}Q8 


Sing. 


a galley. 


N. (^: 


XQiriQ'fiq 


G. 


Toi'^Q-sog, ovg 


D. 


JQLrJQ-U, fl 


A. 


TQlJQ-ia, -f} 


V. 


JQirJQsg 


Dual 




N.A.V 


.TQlTjQ-eey 7} 


G. D. 


TQlTlQ-ioiVf Olv 


Plur. 




N. 


TQir^Q-efg, ug 


G. 


iQLtiQ-iojv, (av 


D. 


TOLTiq-iai 


A. 


TQirfQ-sag, eig 


V. 


TQir^g-Sfg, tig 



aX^&i 


TSIXS 


true. 


a walL 


(to) aXrj&ig 


(to) jfixog 


alTi&-eogf ovg 


Tslx-sog, ovg 


aXrj&s^i, u 


THX-tiy £1 


akrj&eg 


Tslxog 


aXrj&ig 


Tslxog 


aXT]&-'is, rj 


TBix-es, fj 


aXrj&-soLv, olv 


Tsix-eoiv, oTv 


aXr)&-ia, i) 


xuX'tUy rj 


aXr^d-icov, ujy 


Tf/^-£(UV, COV 


aXri&-ioi 


TslX-ioi 


aXTj&-ea, ij 


Tflx-fccy rj 


aXri&-ia, rj 


xdx-ta, J]. 



Exc. Many masculine nouns in f, instead of 
lengthening a into ?/, insert v, probably from the 
ancient digamma; thus, jiaatksFs^ softened /3a- 
oiXevs^ Dat. PI. jiaacXevat. The Attics here 



make the Gen. Sing, in 05. 



Sing. 6 {king) 
N. iSaaiXsvg 
G. ^aaiXfbig 
D. PaoiX-i'it li 
A. paaiXia 
V\ ^aoiXtv 



Dual Plural 

N. A. V. j3aaiX'iB N. paaiXifg, ug 
G. D. (SaoiX'fOLV G. j5aaiX-e(ov 
D. puaiXivai 
j A. l3uaiX-iag, tig 
i V. ^aaiX-ieg, ug. 

4. Roots in i. 



These change t, in most feminine nouns, into 
f, in all cases except the Nom., Ace, and Voc. 
Sing. In the Gen. Sing, these have w^, in the 
Dual, cpv. The Ace. Sing, ends in v. 



42 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 





Root xfc. 




Singular. 


2>«/aZ. 


Plural 


N. (o)x/?^ 


N. A. V. xl-B 


N. x/-«j: 


G. }iL-6g 


G, D. xi-dlv 


G. Xfc-WV 


D. xt-/ 




D. xi-a/ 


A. Tilv 




A. x/-a^ 


V. x/? 


Root TToAt. 


V. ^Ug, 


Singular, 


Z>2/a/, 


Plural 


N. (t]) TToAt^ 


N. A. V. nohs 


N. TToA-ff?, ng 


G. TioAsoj^ 


G. D. noXmv 


G. TToAswv 


D. noXei, noXei 




D. 7roA«(Tt 


A. TToA^y 




A. noX-^ag, fig 


V. tioXl 




V. TToA-sf?, sig. 



Neuters in l do not attach a for the nomina- 
tive ; divrjTZL -bos^ -d st, cfLvrfTtt, &c. 

5. Roots ill 0. 

These in the nominative lengthen o into a, 
and part of them omit a; as, ^ aldos (atSo), 
shame; ^ i^x^ (VX^)^ echo. The Dual and Plu- 
ral follow the second declension. 

N. ai86g^ G. aidoos atSovs, D. atSoi alSoij A. 
aiSoa aldSj V. atdot. N. 7^;^«, G. i]x^os ^}xovs, 
D. :^;^o'i ?/;for, A. rjxoa ij/S, V. :^;^or. 

Anomalous is j3ovs (root j3o, with digamma, 
pSFsj j3ovg^ Lat. bos, bovis, &c.), G. ^o-og, D. 
^o-t, A. /Sow, V. j3ov. Plur. /3ofg /Soi]'?, G. ^oSp, 
D. ^ov6l^ a. j3oa? ^ot;^, V. /3of?. 

6. i?(;o/5 in v. 

Neuters reject a in the Nominative. Some 
masculines and neuters change v into s in all 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



45 



the cases except the Nom., Ace, and Voc. Sing. 
The Ace. Sing, ends in v. 

Root, (o) ^OTQV 

Sing, grape 

^oTfjvog 

pOTQVV 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 

Dual 

G. D. ftoTQl/OlV 

Plural. 

N. ^oTQV-egf vg 

G. ^OTQVWy 

A. jSoTQV-agf vg 

V, ^oTQV-sg, vg 



(to) dcxTigv 

tear 

dtxygv 

duxQVog 

daxQv'l 

ddy.QV 

diix^v 

dayQVS 
duxQVoiv 

daxQva 

duXQVCOV 

daxQvai 
dux()vci 
duxgva 



(o) nsXexv 

axe 

neXixvg 

TtsXixeoog 

nsXsx-u, u 

TiiXsxvv 

niXixv 



(to) aoTU 
city 

CKJTV 

uoTS-og & tag 

Sojv 
auTV 



neXtxss 
neXexioiv 

neXex-feg, eig 

TifXixe-cov 
mXixiOL 
7TfXix-iag, sig 
TTsXix-fBC, sig 



«aTf-«, 7j 

(XUTtOJP 
SoTfOL 

aoTfa, aaiTi 
Sais-tt, rj. 



7. Roots in a. 

Nominative adds tr. 6 66g^ jackal^ G. doos^ 
D. doty A. 0(5a, V. 0«g, Dual 0c5f, Ooolv, PL 
OaeSy G. dcocoVy D. Ocooi^ A. Ocoas^ V. does. 

8. Anomalous. 

There are two nouns of this declension, from 
roots in a with the digamma. 

^ vavsy a ship^ (root va, vaFg^ vavg, Lat. na- 
vis^) G. veag^ D. v?^?, A. vavv, V. vav, Dual 
vrje, vEolVy PL v?Jff?, vfwi/, vavai^ vavs^ vjjss. 

if ygavsy an old womariy (root yga^ ygdFs^ 
ygavgy) G. ygaos^ D. ygaC^ A. ygavv^ V. ;/pav. 
PL N. V. ygasg ygavg^ G. ygaSv, D. ygavoi^ 
j A. ;^gaag ygavg. 



44 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



^ 29. EXERCISES ON THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. . 

1. Mute and Liquid Nouns. 

""O dy^v Tov XiovTog xat tSv tcvvcov. ^Ev to 
dTOfiUTL TOV xoXaxos ioTLv tog. ^jy Tvgavvls ddc- 
xtag fiyJTTig iaxiv. ^O SeiXog jrjg najgiSos ngoSo- 
Trig ioTtv. Ol dyadol dvSgeg OeSv eixovag datv. 
*^0 deog i(jiL (pSg. Td ngdyfxaTa tSv dvSgSv 
ioTtv iv x^9^^ ^^^ Saifiovcov. ""If (js}^7Jv7f xat ol 
doTsgeg stai XafiJiddsg Tijg vvxTog. ^O Zevg 7jv 
TtaTtlg tSv Satfiovcov xal dva^ dvSgcov. *^H dcpgo- 
dvvtf Tolg dvOgcDKoig 2J(pi/^ eaxiv. Tjj yaoxegL 
ovx eOTLv ©ra. 

2. Pure Nouns. 

Nvv idTi xgiatg tov xoafxov tovtov. Uagd 
Totg "EXXtjcjlv ixuTOv ^aav TgLjjgsLg. ^H cpvatg 
dvsv fiadijcjsSg iart TvcpXov. ' O NuXog a^sc 
(has) Tcavxota yavrf t/Ovcov. Keghj novrfgd 
it^Tiv dsi ^rifxia. XaXanov to yqgdg idTiv dvdgS- 
Ttoig ^dgog. "^ H MavSdvq i^v ^^OTvdyovg 6v- 
ydxrig^ ^aaiXacog tSv MijScov, H^co iaxt dvyd- 
T7ig Tijg dgi^ioviag. ^' Egtl nXrjdog tcov ^OTgvcov iv 
TOtg dix7iakS(jiv rji.icov. Td Tat/tf Tr^g noXaas 
idTLV vxpijkd xat idj^vgd. 

3. Promiscuous Exercises on the Third 
Declension. 

*^0 OdvaTog ioxi SidXvdig Tijg tpv/rjg xal tov 
d6fiaTog. ""Jig ol doTagag ataiv ovgavov xoa^og^ 



¥ 



' STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 45 

ovTos ol oixTfTogss xXiog rijs noXsos. Tovto 
iaiiv ovecSos dOdvarov. To ^tcpog ioxiv iv ratv 
Xsgolv Trig M^9^^' ^^ ocpstg top lov iv tols 
oSovoiv s)^ovaiv (have). ^JEv Bolcotlcl 8vo eaxlv 
BTiLaij^a ogy}^ to ^t^V {the one) KtOaigSv^ to Si 
(the other) ' EXiyccov. 'H la/vs tcov SsikSv ioxiv 
iv nooi. ^Haav nevre jgujgsis iv Xifiivt ixeivco. 
^OjiXov Xiovoiv iaiLv dXxij^ zavgois xsgara, TOtg 
dvdgdoL Xoyog xai aocpia. 

^ 30. EXERCISES IN ALL THE DE- 
CLENSIONS. 

1. ^i XTjjasLS Tjjs dgsTTJg (xovai ^i^atac stotv. 
^ H TiaiSeia iv fiiv latg svivxiatg xoofiog iaxivy 
iv 8i jaig dTv^tciig xaiacpvyij. At Movaat Jiog 
xai 3Iv7ffioavp7fg dvyaiegeg eiaiv. ' O Atvog rjv 
Ttatg "^Egiiov xai Movaijg Ovgaviag. JTvvai^i 
xoofiog ?) otj^ij ioTLv. Tea jtoSa ' Hcpaiaxov ^aav 
Xco?,OL. "Agyog 6 Ttavomifg bI)^bv oftfiaia iv oXco 
T(o aco^iaxi. ' H AiyviiTog Scogov iarc tov Net- 
Xov. Ilovog evxXsiag najjjg. At 06gxov Ov- 
yajsgeg rjoav ygalai ix ysveTrjg. ^O '^Eg^rjg^ 
Maiag xai Jiog vlog^ rjv dyyeXog tcov Gecov xai 
xijgv^ TOV naTgog. 

2. English into Greek. 

j1 divinity. A king. Of a divinity. Of a 

king. Of the divinity. Of the king. Of the 

divinities. Of the kings. The son of the king. 

The father of the king. A daughter of the king. 

4 



46 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

A lio7i. The teeth of the lion. The light of day. 
The stars of night. The tongue of the flatterer 
(xoAa|). The water of life. The waters of the 
river. There are fishes in the sea. Minerva 
(^Adriva) was the daughter of Jupiter (riv Ovya- 
Ttfg^ not Tf dvyajTig). Latona (^?^Te&) teas moth- 
er of Apollo and Diana ('^grsixig). lo was the 
daughter of Inachus. 

§ 31. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. 

1. These have usually two, sometimes but one 
termination, and conform in their inflexion to 
nouns of the same ending and gender. Their 
inflexion, therefore, will create no difficulty. 

9 ,,v ^,, 5 ^ ^ «(jp^wy, TO acpgov, foolish. 
( vj. rov trig tov aq)govog, CSLC. 

So comparatives in wv, except that they contract ova into 
G), and oveg and ovag into ovg ; as, fisl^ova (isl^fo, nsl^ovsg and 
fisl^ovag fisl^ovg. 



q S ^ V oi^V^V^> "^^ alrj&ig, true, 

' ' ' ^ G. TOV T% tov aXr^&sog aXfj&ovg, &C. 

4i o V aggiiVy to aggev, male. 
. 71V, SV < ^ ' \^ 'v ^ V. c Xr « 

( VJ. tov Tl}g TOV CCQQSVOg, 6LC, 

er ^ 'n Id gig, to I'dgi, skilful. 

( ijr. TOV TTjg TOV vOQiog, OLC, 

So Tig, who, tI, G, Tcvog, D. tIvl, A. tIvu tL Dual Tive, 
tlvoiv. PI. x/yf? Tiva, G. tIvojv, D. x/at, A. Tivag tLvu. 

6. So vg, V, G. vog, — w^, og, G. ogog, — ovg, ovv, G. odog, 
— ig, I, G. LTog, — ag, av, G. avTog, 

7. Some adjectives are compounded with 
substantives, as (jiaxgoxsig, long handed. Some 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 47 

in op, as dTtdrcog^ without father^ and others 
have but one termination, being used only in 
the masculine and feminine. 

§ 32. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES OF 
TWO TERMINATIONS. 

' H y-q €f(paLgosL87Jg iartv. ^ Ena^uvcyvSa^ jra- 
xgos v^v dcpavovs. ' H I^txeXia iait vijaog evcpo- 
gos xat svSaificov. ' O dfxady}? nXovaios iart ngo- 
jiaiov j^gvaoitaXXov. Ovjog 6 dvi]g r^v dndxcog 
xat dfijjzcog. Ovx dacpaksg roig dviixotg to vipos. 
' H Aegvaia vdga f£^£v ifTtsg/xsyedes oco/xa^ xf- 
(paXd<; Si ivvia^ rag fxiv oxico dvifxas^ Ttjv Si 
[^LEdriv dddvaxov. Evysvis nut evysv6v yoviov ! 
' O xov gr^xogog Xoyog nhjgrjg iaxl nsidovs. 

§ 33. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST 
AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 

Of this class are the following adjective and 
participial terminations. 

{nag, ail, jtciaa, nav, (root narx, navxa, 
niiVToaf navT.) 
G. TiavTogt Ttdor^g, 

2f uiXag, ufXaira, ueXav, black, 
. ag, aivuy av I ^ V/^ \^, 

( U. fisAayog, ^uaiifjg, fiUavog. 

{ iv7iT(jJv, TVTiTovaa, ivnxov (r. tvtxxovx^ f. 
3. o)v, ovotty ov < xvTxxovxaa?) 

( G. xvnxovxogy xvnxovarjg, xv7ixovxog,striking. 
So contracted forms in nav. itov lovaa iov, G. iovxogy &C. 

(av ovoa ovv, ovvxog. 



1. ««:, «aa, av 

^ ' ' navxog. 



48 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



{ dsLxvvg, deiTcvvaa, dsixvvv, (r. dsLxvvvt, f. 

4. vg, VGoc, vv < dsiHvvvxaa,) 

I G. dsLxvvvTogy dsLxvvai^g, dsLtivvvTogySlioicing, 

C tvq>&slg, Tvcpd^elaa, rvcpd^iv, (r. Tvcp&svr, 

5. sig, eiacCf ev < f. jvcpd^ivToa.) [struck. 

( G. Tvq)&evTog, ivcp&slorjg, xvcp&svrog, being 

C Xf^Q^^^?y x^q'^^^^^9 x^Q^^^> Cornell/, (r. /a- 

6. eig, eaaa, ev < qlsvt.) 

\ G. j^of^/gyro^, xagiiGGTig, xctqUvTog, 
So contracted forms in oa?. osi? osooa obv, G. osrro?, &c. 

ovg ovooa ovv, ovvxog, 

dovg, dovaa, doVj (r. dovx, dovraa, dovT,) 



{ oovgy dovaa, doVj (r. dovi 

7, ovg, ovaa, ov < having given. 

\ G. dovTog, dovatjg, dovxog, 

8. (og, via, og < 

( kffxcjg, sGxcjoa, sgxc 
< sGxcox,) standing. 

f G. SGXWTOg, SGXCOGl]g, 



&c. 

xsxvq)(agf xsxvcpvla, x£xvq)6g, (r. xsxvq)ox,) 

having struck. 
G, Tsxvcpoxog, xexvcpvlag, xsxvcpoxog. 

sGxojg, sGxcoGa, sGxcog, (r. eGxaox, contr. 



(ag, (OGa, wg 



sGxcoxog. 



10. vg ua v \ ^Q^'Xv^^ pQf^X^'^oiy ^Q^^X^y short. 
^ ' (G- ^gcexsog, ^gaxuag, ^gaxsog. 

n( XEQ71V, xegsiva, xigsv. tender, 
. riv, Siva, ev { r>^ , ^ ,^ , 

( ij. xsgsvog, xsgsvvr^g, xsgevog. 

12. As specimens of the above, we decline 
the following. 

Singular. Plural. 



N. 


nag 


naGa 


ndv 


N. 


ndvxsg 


ndoal 


ndvxa 


G. 


navxog 


ndGtjg 


navxog 


G. 


ndvxcov 


naoSv 


ndvxcov 


D. 


navxl 


naGt] 


navxl 


D. 


ndoL 


ndaaig 


ndoi 


A. 
V. 


navxa 

nag 


naGav 
naGa 


ndv 
ndv 


A. 
V. 


ndvxag 
navxsg 


ndoag 
ndoav 


ndvxa 
ndvxa 



Dual. 

N. A, V. ndvxs ndoa ndvxs 
G. D. ndvxoiv ndGauv ndvxoiv 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 49 

Sweet, 
Singular, Plural, 

N. ^^i!^ 7^8 ua rjdv N. ^d-ieg, sig ridslai rjdsa 

G. Tjdeog ridelag '^deog G. fjdscov fjdeiojv 't]8i(dv 

D. fjd-i'L, H rjdsla rjd-i'l, st D. ^dioL fjdsiaig tjdiat^ 

A, fjdvv ridfiav rjdv A. '^d-soig, stg rjdelag ^^dia 

V. '^dv '^dela i]dv V. rjd-seg, sig rjdelat, ^t^dea 

Dual, 
N. A. V. r^dss rjdfla ^dis 
G. D. rfdeoiv tjdeiaLV i^dioiv 

TtTVCfxag, 
Singular, Plural. 

N. Tnv(f)-(igy vloiy 6g N. TtTvcp-ong, vlaiy ora 

G. jnvfp-oiog, viag, ojog G. TeTtcp-oTcov, vicjv, oxoiv 

D. TCTfqp-oTt, via, OIL D. mv(p-6oi, vlaig, 6a i 

A. mvcp-oTa, vlavj 6g A. TSTVcf-orag, vlag, oxa 

V. TETVip-dgf v7a, 6g V. jtTV(p-6isgf vlai, oxa 

Dual 

N. A. V. TlTVCp-OXey vluy oxs 

G. D. x£xvq)-6xoiv, viaiv, oroiv 

Remark. The student should be exercised 
in giving the roots of adjectives and participles, 
and explaining the laws of the changes, as far 
as they are obvious. As in jrag, the form of the 
feminine throughout; as, navraa ndaa^ ndviarfg 
Ttdaijg^ TtdvTOaig ndaatg^ the Dat. PI. Mas. ndvT- 

(SL TtdOL. In TVTZTCOV TV7tT0VT(Sa TVTlTOVCfay TV- 

movTOL TVTiTovat, TvnxovTOais rvnTovaatg. 

^ 34. SOME IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES, 

1. Miyas^ great J and noXvg^ mitch^ derive all 
their cases except the Masculine and Neuter 
of the Nom., Ace, and Voc, Sing., from the ob- 
solete noKXos and (leydXog. 



50 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Smg, TioXvg nolh] nolv N. lisyag fisydX^ [liya 

G. TToXX-ov -rjg ^-ov G. fisydX-ov -rjg -ov 

D. TToAA-w -fi -cS D. ^sydX-co -j] -(o 

A, noXvv TtoXXrjV noXv A. fisyav (xsydXrjv fisya 

V. noXv noXXri noXv V. i^eya (xsydXrj fieya 

DualnoXX-oi -d -a Dual ^iydX-m -a -« 

-otv -ouv -olv -OLV -aiv -oiv 

PL noXX-ol -Oil "d, &C. PL ixsydX-oi -on -a,&C. 

2. JYumerals. 

N. ug (one) ^la ev So ovdalg, ovde^ia, ovdsv, no one. 

G. evog {nidg svog f^r^dsig, fiTjdsfila, firidiv. 

D. kvL fiid hi 

A. sva ^lav sv 

TQsTg (three), t^/«, G. tqioov, D. tqigL A. xqugy rgla, 
Tsoaagsg (four), Tsooaga, G. Tsaodgcov, D. jsaoagah A. riaoa- 
gag, xiaoaga, 

§35. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES- 

1. Adjectives of the First ajstd Third 
Declensiojvs. 

Sga^eta jigxpts ^Sovrig xaxrjg. Bgaj^vg 6 
fiiog^ ri di ri/vij fiaxgd. Ssvocpcov e^st [liXavas 
iTiTtovs^ xal [xi}.ava onXa^ xal natjav Ttjv iodiJTa 
fxikatvav. ^'Anav to aw^id ictzt fieXav. "^ H fid- 
^a k'/si oaii-qv /agUaaav. To diufxa tSv f^iskd- 
vcov oTcXcov 7fv j^agiBv. Ilaariv rcov dgerSv tjys- 
fiSv ic^TLv ri svae^eca. "^ H yscpvgd iarcv svgua 
xal 6 Ttorafxos ^advs. At ivxoXai aov ^agecai 
ovx etcfiv. ^Ey^ ix6v etfu ayyaXog dov. "^ H ^liv 
xogrf TsgsLvd iaii, id 8i dvdri rigsva. 

2. Promiscuous Exercises on Adjectives. 

Trjg TiaiSeLas at fiiv gi^at nixgac daiv^ ot Si 
xagitol yXvxetg. Elg iaxi Oeog xal ovx sdjiv 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 51 

ilXXos TtXriv avTov. Kaxov xigdog, ^agv xeifXTJ- 
Xlov. OvSelg aSixog eaiai fioL cpiXos. ^O Sixuios 
liovog ioTL fxaxoigLos. ^O Hagvacfctds ^leya xal 
avaxLov ogog eaxiv. Koivd iaxt ra xirjixaja tcov 
€piX(ov. ^O (xav 6egi(j[xds noXvs e6TLv^ ot 8s igyd- 
zac oXiyot. Oi/rfjog fiiv ovSetg iazcv evSacfiov 
dvrig. ^PSfiTf (Aexd jxiv (pgovrjaeas (ocpiXcfLOSj 
dvsv 8i javTTfg ^Xa^egd. Ol XoyoL aov dXi^dsts 
£Lcfc xai ^i^aiot xal ogdoL To f,ciXi {xiv yXvxVy 
yXvxeta 8i i^ aocpia. 

3. English into Greek. 
Thy words are true and just. Thy name 
(ovofia) is holy. The house is beautiful. This 
is a beautiful house. Mortal life is not always 
happy. Virtue is a strong weapon. Virtue is 
useful (xQV^^t^o^) (^^^d lasting. A little time. 
Much time. Among (iv) many men there are 
many minds. Olympus was a lofty {vxpjjXos) 
mountain. The waters are full of fishes. In the 
mountains are many and great animals. The 
body is mortal, but the soul immortal (to oSfjia 
fxivj Tj rpvxif 8e). 

§ 36. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives are regularly compared by 
adding to the root xsgos and xaxos ; as, 

iVQV (N. evQvg) BVQV-JSQog, TOTog, 

fiaxctQ {fiuxaQ) fiaxuQ-js^og, jaTog. 

fitXoLV {fiiXag) fieXdv-Tfgog, jujog, 

xXhvo {^aXuvog) nXsivo-ngogf icnog, 

oo(fo {aocfog) aocpd-regog, raiog. 



52 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Like €io(p6s all adjectives in o with a short 
penult. 

2. Sometimes (X, introduced to strengthen 
the form (see also § 47, 5.), makes arsgos and 
axoLTog^ which, increased by f, becomes eazsgog 
and iaxaTos. These latter forms again, by a 
change frequent in the Greek language, become 
iaregos and cdTUTog. Thus, 

aXrjd-e (akrj&y^g) ali]d-s-aTsgog, arciTog. 

aWCpQOV {oWQpQOiv) O(xHp(J0V~ioTSQ0g, SGTaTOg, 

agjiay (^agna^) agTiay-loTsgog, laxoLTog, 

3. The above terminations are affixed some- 
times with the omission of o, sometimes of other 
letters. The following are given as specimens. 

cpilo {epilog) q>lX-Tsgog, raiog, and g)dal-Tsgog, zaxog, 

ysQciLo (yegocLog) ysgal-regog, ToiTog, 

nakaio {naXaiog) nocXal-rsgog, xazog, 

anXoo {anXoog) anXo-eGtegog, ioxctjog. 

XaXo {XdXog) XaX-larsgog, laidTog, 

nevriT {nh'rjg) nsv-sorsgog, saiarog, 

4. Some adjectives in vs^ and some in gos 
(dropping the g), make their comparisons in 
liov and lotos ; as, t^8vs, rjStcov^ rjdKjzos • ataj^gos^ 
ai6xL(ov^ atoxtOTos. In a few comparatives, the 
f, with the preceding consonant, is changed 
into (jO or zr ; as, iXaj^vs^ eXdaacov^ aXdj^iaTos • 
rally's {6a%)j ddaaov^ Td;^ lotos. 

^ 37. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
I. 

xaXog xaXXlwv aaXXiatog 

TiaKog itaxlcov xdxiorog 

Xdgcov j^slgiaiog 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 53 



TioXvg nXuoiV 


lilyiaxog 

nXiiaxog 


aya&og afislrtoy 
^sXtIwv 


agiaiog 
jSeXTiarog 


ygdntov 
X(o(av 


TigdriaTog 
Xi^arog 


From prepositions. 




TTQO ngoTFQog 


ngajTog 


vnsQ vniQjfQog 


vnegiuTog 


Adverbs are compared. 




av(o arcoTigo) 


avtajaTfa 


xaro) xoTcuTi^o) 


XaJOJTUKO 


1^(0 e^ontgb) 


fJWT«TW 


law (Ob)Tfgw 


foajTaJb) 


Irreg. fidXa ^uXXov 


^dXioJa 



§ 38. EXERCISES ON COMPARISON. 

OvSip XTij^a aigsr^regov iaiL rijs agsTij?. 
OvSev ioTL yXvxLov t7j9 naTgiSog. /JtivoTdxij tSv 
difgiov icTLv ri d^iadta. *0 ddvaios xotvos xat 
(both) rots x^LgioTOL^ xat jotg jisXiLOJOig. ^O 
xgox68st?.og l| iXa^LOTov yiyvejai (becomes) [xi- 
y^idiog • TO /^lev ydg 66v ov fxstXov iaxl /ifvsiov^ 
avTos Si ytyvsTai Inid xal Sexdnij^^vg. Hgeajiv' 
TUTOv Tcov ovTcov, Osos ' dysvvrfjos ydg • xdXXt- 
axov xoo^iog • noirji^ia ydg deov. Tig iaxc [xh- 
'Cov iv Tj) ^aaiXsia t6v ovgavcjv ; Zocpia nXov- 
Tov XTrjfia Tifxiajegov. ' H (pgovrfatg xal ij vyt- 
Ha fisyiara jolg dvOgconotg dyadd. ' H xketvo- 
rdrrf Jtokig iv ' EXXdSt jfv ^^dijvat^ 2JcjxgdTrfg 
(jocpozaiog tjv tcov cpiXoaocpcov xal dcocpgovedTa- 
Tog. ^ H IJixekca naoov xov vrfiov xgaxidxtf 



54 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

ictriv. z/o|a iartv daOevrjs ayxvQa, jiXovxog ht 
daOsvsaiega. 

Remarks. 1. After comparatives, the Gen- 
itive is used ; as, StxatoTegos ifxov, more just 
than I; otherwise the particle ^', tharij is em- 
ployed ; as, TovTo [iol [idkXov dgecfxst rj (^oi^ this 
pleases me more than thee. 

2. After superlatives, interrogatives, &c., the 
Genitive Plural is used. 

§ 39. THE VERB. 

Such is the fullness and perfection of the 
Greek verb, so varied, and yet so philosophical 
and simple its structure, that the study of it 
furnishes one of the most delightful, profitable, f 
and important exercises to the Greek student. 
We shall, therefore, treat it at considerable j 
length. 

1. The Greek Transitive Verb has three 
voices. Active, Passive, and Middle. The Mid- 
dle has but four tenses peculiar to itself, and 
as these follow in their formation the analogy 
of the Passive, or rather are, in form, strictly 
passive tenses, w^e shall, in inflexion, make but 
two voices, active and passive. 

2. The Greek verb has six moods, the in- 
dicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, infin- 
itive, and participle. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 55 

3. Strictly speaking, the subjunctive and opta- 
tive form but one mood. They both state the ac- 
tion of the verb conditionally^ the subjunctive be- 
ing the conditional mood for the primary tenses 
to which it is allied in formation, the optative, 
for the secondary or past tenses ; as, rvjiTco iVa 
XTSLvoj I strike that I may slay ; Irvi/^a tVa 
ycTBLvaiiiLj I struck that I might slay. They 
might, perhaps, not improperly be named con- 
ditional present and conditional past^ or primary 
conditional and secondary conditional. The 
name optative arises from a single and seconda- 
ry, though not unfrequent, use of the mood, 
which in its original and ordinary use is purely 
subjunctive. The other moods need no partic- 
ular remark. 

§ 40. THE TENSES. 

1. The tenses represent the action of the 
verb in two respects; 1. its time; 2. its state. 
The confounding of these distinct elements has 
occasioned much confusion in grammar. 

2. Time has three divisions, past, present^ 
and future. JVo others are possible. But in 
each of these divisions of time an action may 
be regarded with reference to its state, as con- 
tinuing or completed, or simply as taking place 
without reference either to continuance or com- 
pletion. A complete scheme of the tenses, 
then, would make nine ; thus. 



56 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Present Time, 
I am striking. Going on or imperfect. 
I have struck. Completed or perfect. 
I strike. Simply taking place or absolute. 

Past Time. 
I was striking. Imperfect. 
I had struck. Perfect. 
I struck. Absolute. 

Future Time. 
I shall be striking. Imperfect. 
I shall have struck. Perfect. 
I shall strike. Absolute. 

3. The name of a tense, then, should express 
both its time and its state. Thus hvTtrov^ I was 
striking^ is imperfect, but so also is tvtzto^ I am 
striking. The one is an imperfect in present 
time, or an imperfect present^ the other in past 
time, or an imperfect past. So xhvipa^ I have 
struck^ is a perfect present^^ ixBTvcpBLv^ I had 
struck, a perfect past. We have then an im- 
perfect present, past, and future, {I am striking^ 
I was striking, I shall be striking) ; a perfect 
present, past, and future, (/ hafce struck, I had 



* That this is the true character and designation of this tense, an inspec- 
tion of the above table, and a careful examination of its nature, will, we think, 
clearly show. / have struck evidently sustains the same relation to / am 
striking^ that / had struck sustains to I was striking. But the two latter 
are clearly an imjyerfect and perfect past ; the two former, then, are an itti- 
perfect and perfect present. That is, / am striking {rvTru) represents an 
action now gohig on ; / lf,ave struck (jiTv^et), an action now completed. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 57 

struck^ I shall have struck) ; and an absolute or 
indefinite (aorist) present, past, and future, (/ 
strike^ I struck, I shall strike.) 

4. Of these nine tenses, the Greek verb has 
in the active voice distinct forms for six, in the 
passive, for seven ; thus, 

Present. 
TvuTco, I am striking. Imperfect. 
TBTvcpa, I have struck. Perfect. 

Past. 
hvnxov. I was striking. Imperfect. 
hsxvcpHv, I had sti^ck. Perfect. 
hvyja, I struck. Absolute or Jlorist. 

Future. 
tvyjco, I shall strike or be striking. Absolute usually. 
Pass. TSTvipoi.taiy I shall have been struck. Perfect. 

5. The past tenses are more completely devel- 
oped than either the present or future, for the ob- 
vious reason, that all history and narration being 
of events in past time, more minute specifica- 
tion is here demanded, and therefore a separate 
form exists for the absolute or aorist. The past 
tenses are hence often called historical tenses. 

It matters not whether, in point of fact, it is only at this moment com- 
pleted, or whether the writer only chooses to represent it so. In accord- 
ance with this view is the fact, that both in Greek and Latin the syntactical 
construction of the perfect is the same with that of the so called present. 
This tense has ever been a stumbhngblock to the grammarians, and they 
have generally contented themselves with describing it as a past tense, but 
connected either in itself or in its consequences with the present time. 

5 



58 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

6. It is seen, that, in the present and future 
divisions of time, the Greek verb has not sep- 
arate forms for the imperfect and the absolute. 
For these it employs the same tenses, while in 
the present the imperfect meaning preponder- 
ates, in the future, the absolute meaning. Their 
ordinary significations, then, are as follows. 

Present Time. 
TVTTTG), / am striking. Imperfect. 
TVTtro^ I strike. Absolute. 

TiTV(pa, I have struck. Perfect. 

Past Time. 
hvTtJov, I was striking. Imperfect. 
hvxpay I struck. Absolute or Aorist. 

itejvq)€cvj I had struck. Perfect. 

Future Time. 
Tvxpco^ I shall be striking (rare). Imperfect. 
Tvxpco^ I shall strike (its usual meaning). Absolute. 
Pass. TSTvyjofxai^ I shall have been struck. Perfect. 

7. We shall, then, in designating the tenses, 
as there is but one future act, call it the futurCj 
and the absolute past, designated by its ordi- 
nary name of aorist. The other tenses we shall 
designate as the imperfect present (tvtctco) and 
the perfect present (rhvcpa)^ the imperfect past 
{IxvTtxov) and the perfect past (hervipetv). 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 59 

^ 41. THE TENSES CONTINUED. 

1. The Greek verb has, it is seen, in the 
active voice six tenses. For four of these, 
namely, the future and aorist, perfect present, 
and perfect past, it has two forms, an earlier 
and shorter, and a later and fuller form. The 
earliest forms of the tenses may be supposed 
to have been the following, tvtio^ I strikCj 
hvTtov^ I strucky TSTVTta^ I have struck^ Irarv- 
Tteiv^ I had struck^ Tvitico^ I will strike. In the 
progress of the language, Tvno) is lengthened 
into TVTtTco^ and tvttcj becomes obsolete. From 
TVTtxco is formed exvkxov^ with a fuller signifi- 
cation, / was striking^ while hvnov remains 
with its common meaning, / struck. Tvipco 
takes the place of xvnicoy and in connexion with 
xvyjo is formed hvxpa^ as a more common form 
of the aorist ; while, by aspiration, xexvTca be- 
comes Tsivcpa^ and of course ixexvnscv becomes 
ixexv^sLv. 

2. Thus the scheme becomes : 

Present Tenses. 
TVTtxco. Imperfect. 

xixvTta. Earlier Perfect. 
xkxv(pa. Later Perfect. 

Past Tenses. 
hvTtxov. Imperfect. 
exvTtov. Earlier Aorist. 

exvyja. Later Aorist. 



60 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



izsTVTieLv. Earlier Perfect. 
hexvcpHv. Later Perfect. 

Future Tenses. 
TVTtio. Earlier Future. 

ii/i/;w. Later Future. 

3. The passive and middle voices have in 
the future and aorist the same variety of forms, 
and, in all the voices, the tenses may be ranked 
in pairs, according to their connexion in forma- 
tion; thus: 



Active. 



Passive. 



Middle. 



rvmoo 


Tvmo^ai 




tTVTTTOV 


hvnTOfirjV 




rvmco 
eivjiov 


TVn'^OOfKXl 

hvnriv 


TVTTSO^at 

irvTiofirjv 


TVlpCO 


'ivq)&rjaofiaL 




jETvna 
eTSTvnscv 


TETV^HCtl 




Tixvcpa 
hnvcpBiv 







Imp. Pres. 
Imp. Past 

Ear. Fut. 
Ear. Aor. 

Lat. Fut. 
Lat. Aor. 

Ear. Perf. Pres. 
Ear. Perf. Past 

Lat. Perf. Pres. 
Lat. Perf Past 

Perf Fut. TsiiniJOfim 

4. In most verbs, the earher forms were 
never in use, or have become obsolete. In 
some, however, they have retained their places, 
and in a few, side by side with the later forms. 
Generally, however, and particularly in the fu- 
ture and aorist, where one is found the other is 
wanting, and sometimes euphony, and often, per- 
haps, accident, may have determined between 
them. The earlier future is found only in liquid 
verbs, in which it is almost exclusively used. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 61 

^ 42. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
AUGMENT. 

1. Each tense may, in general, be divided 
into three parts ; the prefix^ the root^ and the 
termination. We shall consider them in their 
order. 

2. The prefix is of two kinds, and employed 
for distinct purposes. In all the past tenses 
the Greeks prefixed to the root f, to indicate 
past time; and in all the perfect tenses they 
prefixed the initial consonant with f, to indicate 
perfect action. 

Past Tenses. e-rvTiTov^ i'XS'jvcpHVj e-ivxpa. 
Per/. Tenses. ja-Tvcpa^ i'Te-jvcpeLv^ TS'Tvyjofxac. 

3. The prefix of the past tenses (e) is called 
the augment ; that of the perfect tenses is 
called the reduplication. One of these tenses 
(eTsivcpeiv, I had struck,) is a perfect past, i. e. 
a perfect tense in past time ; it therefore takes 
both the augment and the reduplication. The 
prefixes then stand thus. Root tvtt, Past e-jyTt, 
Perf. TS'XVTt^ Perf. Past e-Ts-jyTt. 

4. It is thus clear, why the so called pluper- 
fect receives both prefixes. It is a perfect past. 
From the above principles, it also follows, that 
the augment of the past tenses is found only in the 
indicative^ while the reduplication of the perfect 
tenses continues through all the moods. For the 

5* 



62 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

past tenses express past time only in the in- 
dicative, while the perfect tenses express per- 
fect action through all the moods. 

5. When the verb begins with a consonant, 
the augment suffers no change, and is called 
syllabic. In verbs beginning with a vowel, it 
coalesces with the vowel in the following man- 
ner ; sa into ?^, as idxovov rjxovov • so into o, 
as iofiiXsov 6fiLXsov • ss into rj^ islnt^ov rjXTti- 
Zov^ and sometimes into ft, as ssxov bl/ov. So 
the diphthongs av and sv into ?^i/, as iavXovv 
rfvXovv^ iev^ofjirfv r]v/6firfv, and di, oi^ into jf, (Oy 
as iaiTovv jfjovv^ iotxovv coxovv. This is call- 
ed the temporal augment. Many verbs, how- 
ever, neglect it, and verbs in ov, ft, ?^, o, 7, i>, 
with a few exceptions, never take it. 

6. Verbs beginning with a vowel admit, of 
course, no reduphcation. The prefix of the 
perfect tenses, therefore, coincides here, in 
iform, with that of the past tenses ; as, atiicj, 
jjzovvy jfTrjxa. It still, however, retains its dis- 
tinctive character, and is continued through all 
the moods. 

7. Some verbs beginning with a vowel pre- 
fix to the perfect tenses the two first letters of 
the root ; as, aysiga^ ijysgxa^ ay-rjysgxa. This 
is called the Attic reduplication. It often short- 
ens the third syllable from the beginning ; as, 
jjxovuy dx^xoa^ Perf. Past rixrfxoetv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 63 

8. Some verbs take s before the lengthened 
vowel of the past and perfect tenses ; as, 
ogdo, icigcjv^ icigdxa. 

9. Verbs compounded with a preposition 
generally take the prefix after the preposition ; 
as ix^dlXo, i^s^aXXov (^ 9. 2), ixjiepXrixa. 
KaOevSo (evSo rare) makes ixddev8ov and xa- 
dtfvSov. ""Avogdoo makes ^vcjgdovv • ivo/Xeo^ 

^ 43. THE ROOT. 

1. Many verbs have, in the imperfects pres- 
ent and past, a strengthened form, to which 
the terminations are attached, while in all the 
other tenses they are appended to the simpler 
form called the root. In forming, then, the va- 
rious tenses, the root must always be ascer- 
tained, and the tenses formed by combining 
this with the termination. Thus, root tvtt, 
Imp. Pres. tvtttcj, Imp. Past hvnjov (strength- 
ened by t) ; in the other tenses jvTt-aco (tvt/^cj), 
e'TVTt'Oa (hvifja), TS'TVTt'fiaL {rhyfifiai)^ i-Ti/7r- 
difiv [hvcpd-qv)^ (^ 4). 

2. Verbs in tct are from roots in a labial 
I mute, 7t^ ^, or cp ; as, xgvnjcoy tvutco^ gdnzo, 

from xgv6co. xvnco^ gdcpa. 

3. Verbs in aa have generally a root in a 
palatal, x, y^ or ;^, the palatal being dropped 
before aa ; as, jdaao, (pgtaaco, ^rjaaco^ from ret- 



64 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

yco^ cpgiyco^ (3rj%a). A few come from a lingual 
root. 

4. Verbs in ^ have the root in 8 ; as, (pgd^co^ 
(pgdSco (Fut. (pgdS-aco^ (pgdaco). Some have it in 
y\ as, xgd^co^ Tcgdyco (Fut. xgd^o). 

5. The student having learned the termina- 
tions (§ 45) should be accustomed to trace,' 
according to the principles in § 4, the forms of 
the tenses as modified by the different roots ; 
thus : 

Roots. Fut. Aor. Perf. Pres. Perf. Past. 

ray- {rocy-au) ru^u sra^a (riray-a) vlroip^a vira.y-f/.ui 

9ru0~ {^riiS'iru) <jeii(Tu %'ruffec (crcTei^-a) srtarg/^a (jriTsi^-fAcii) ^iru^fAai 

6. The pure root can be precisely ascertain- 
ed from the earlier aorist, as here the vowel of 
the termination makes no change in the final 
letter of the root ; thus, roc;/-, Aor. e-jay-ov. 
From the later future or aorist ralcj, IVa|a, it 
might indeed be ascertained, that the root was 
a palatal, but not which, as xd^co^ might spring 
equally from Tdy-aco^ rdx-aco^ and jdx-dco. So 
wnth the Perfect active and passive, later Aor. 
Pass., &c. 

7. The earlier aorist is generally the shortest 
possible form. Hence verbs in AA and fiv re- 
ject a consonant; as, jidlXa, Imp. Past e^aXXov^ 
Aor. s^aXov. Diphthongs in the root reject, 
in this tense, one of their vowels ; as, Xsltzc), 
sXhtcov^ XecTtaoj XiXeicpa^ Aor. ekinov. Long 
vowels are shortened ; as, X^do^ tXadov. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 65 

§ 44. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 

1. To many pure roots ex is attached, the 
radical vowel lengthened, and the initial con- 
sonant repeated with l ; as, /vo-, yvoax^ yvoaxy 
yiyvcaaxo ' fiva-^ fxtfivrjaxcj • rpo-, jixgooxco. Some 

' do not change the vowel ; as, Sga-, StSgdaxo. 
j Some, beginning with a vowel, of course have 

no reduplication, and change f or o into l; as, 

svgs-^ evglaxco • ccAo-, dXioxco. 

2. Another class of verbs attach av to the 
root, and insert a nasal before the last conso- 
nant ; as, fiad-^ fiavOdvo ' ^^X'^ rvyxdvco ' Aaj3-, 

j Xafi^dvo • diy-^ dtyydvco • Aa0-, Xavddvo (^ 4. 
4). 

3. All these lengthened forms are found only 
in the Imp. Pres. and Past tenses ; as, yvo-^ 
ytyvcoaxcoj syiyvcoaxov^ Fut. yvco-aofxat^ e-yvcoxa, 
&c. 

4. There are many anomalous verbs in Greek, 
i. e. verbs whose tenses are derived from dif- 
ferent roots. These different roots, the stu- 
dent should be accustomed to trace out. Thus, 
ndaxco^ Ear. Aor. euadov (root /raO-), Pres. at- 
taches ax and drops 0, ndda/co^ ndaxco^ Fut. jra- 
aofjtaL^ from nsvO-y nevdaofxai, naiaofxai (^ 4. 7), 
Perf. s changed into o, ninovda • sygtoxa (see 
above, 1), Ear. Aor. evgov (root svg-), Fut. 
evgijao)^ Perf. svgrfxa (root sygs-, ^ 43). 



66 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



^ 45. TERMINATIONS. 

Passive. Middle. 
0(iaL 

OflTfV 

fiat 
(iriv 
tft^ofiat sofiat 

TfV OflTfV 

drf(jO[iaL aofiac 

Orfv (jUfirfv 

cfofjcat 

2. Example ; root ygacp-^ augment a with past 
tenses, red. ys with perfect tenses. Let the 
student make the requisite changes in the fol- 
lowing. We give the tenses in the same order 
as above. 

Passive. 



I. 


\ctive 


Imp. Pres. 


(0 


Imp. Past 


ov 


Perf. Pres. 


a 


Perf. Past 


BLV 


Ear. Put. 


€G) 


Ear. Aor. 


OP 


Lat. Put. 


ao 


Lat. Aor. 


aa 


Perf. Put. 





Active. 

t-yqaop-ov 

yi-ygacp-a 

s-ys-yQcccp-SLV 

yqacp-ib) 

{e-ygacp-ov) * 

ygdcp-aw 

B-ygacp-aa 



ygoLCp-o^ai 

i-ygacp-o/iirjv 

yi-ygoLCp-nai 

i'-ys-yg(xq)-fjriv 

ygacp-riaoiicti 

i-ygdcp-riv 

ygaq)-&TJaofiaL 

i-ygd(p-d^r}v 

ye-ygdcp-aoixat, 



Middle. 



ygacp-BOjLLai 
{i-ygotcp-6(xriv) * 
ygoLQp-Go^ai 
i-ygacp-adf.iTjv 



3. Let the student thus form the tenses of 
TVTTTco^ jdaaco^ referring to the next section for 
rules concerning the perfect active. 



* Wanting, because like the Imperfect Past active and passive. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 67 

§ 46. PECULIARITIES IN DIFFERENT 
CLASSES OF VERBS.-MUTE VERBS. 

1. The later perfect active is formed by as- 
pirating the labial and palatal roots, and in lin- 
guals it inserts x, dropping the lingual, x is 
here to be regarded as a strong aspiration. 

2. The perfect sometimes changes 3 into o 
in the active, and in the passive ev into v ; as, 

3. The perfect passive frequently changes 3 
of the root into a ; as, Tgencoy TaTgafifxat. So 
the earlier aorist active, rginoy axganov. 

4. Example of mute verbs ; Xsiitco, root Aftzr-, 
short XltI'. 

Active. Passive. Middle. 

Imp. Pres. lun-ta Xun-o^aL 

Imp. Past i-Xhti-ov i-lELit-o^riv 

Ear. Perf. Pres. Xf-Xoin-a * Xs-Xsifi-fxai 

Ear. Perf. Past i-Xe-Xoln-SLv i-Xt-ld^-^riv 
Lat. Perf. Pres. Xi-XiKfi-a 
Lat. Perf. Past i-Xs-Xslcp'SLv 

Ear. Fut. Xm-ita Xm-T^aofioci Xin-eofiat 

Ear. Aor. e-Xlti-ov i-Xln-riv i-Xi7i-6(j,r}V 

Lat. Fut. Af/^co(;r-aG)) Xeicp-drioo^oti XuipoiiOLi,\n-ao^aC) 

Lat. Aor. e-Xenfja s-XH(p-^r^v i-Xsupdfir^v 

Perf. Fut. XE-Xdipofiai (n-oofiai) 

Examples for practice, nudco^ ngdaao), aSco, 

* The earlier perfect inclines strongly to o in the root, and therefore often 
changes t into §, 



68 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

^ 47. PURE VERBS.^ 

1. Pure verbs uniformly want the earlier fu- 
ture and aorist, unless they borrow them from 
some obsolete, impure root ; as, algi(o, Ear. 
Aor. elXov, from eXo. 

2. In the perfect, they insert x before a and 
eev, and have no earlier perfect ; as, TtecpUrf-xa, 
inscpLX-q-xsiv. | 

3. In all the tenses except the imperfect 
present and past, the final vowel of the root is 
lengthened, a and f into t^, and o into « ; as, 
{fiXs) (piXri'dco^ i(pLXrf'(ja, TtscpcXrf'Xa, TtecpiXtf- 
fiat, i(pLXrj-drfv^ cpiXyi-aofxai^ &c. 

Exc. A few in acj, as lao, iacKo • in Xaco^ 
as yeXdco • in eco^ as xaXeco xaXedo^ rsXico rsXi- 
(TO, and others, for which consult the lexicons. 
Algsco^ Aor. Pass, jfgidriv • atvic) aiviooy jjvsaa^ 

4. Many lose a in their later future ; as, zf- 
Xi(j(o TsXso Tf Ac5, TsXiaofiac TeXov^iai • o^iooo^ai 
Ofioofxat ofjiovfiat. 

5. Many in the passive tenses, particularly 
when the vowel remains short, insert a to 
strengthen the form ; as, TeieXeaixat, hsXaadriv^ 
for TersXsfjLaij hsXidrfv. 

* Verbs whose root terminates in a vowel ; as, ^iXiea, root ^/Xe. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



69 



Example. (ptXio, root (ptXe. 

Passive. 
q)dt-ofiaL 

(piXr}-&rfaoiiaL 
i-(fiXri-&r]v 



Active. 
Imp. Pres. q)iU-(a 

Imp. Past i-(f)lU-ov 

Lat. Perf. Pres. ns-ipdrj-xa 
Lat. Perf. Past e-7is-(f)di]-xeiv 
Lat. Fut. q)drj-o(a 

Lat. Aor. i-cfdri-aa 

Perf. Fut. 



Middle. 



(fidri-aofAOLi 
i-(pd7]-adfiTiV 



Examples for practice. SrfXoo, Ttfxdco^ yeXdco^ 

^ 48. LIQUID VERBS. 

1. These form all the tenses, except the im- 
perfects present and past, from the short root. 

2. The earlier perfect frequently changes s 
of the root into o, and lengthens other short 
vowels ; as, xrfv-, exxova • cpav-^ necprfva • t^A-^ 
xiriXa. 

3. The later perfect inserts x before a and 
eiv ; as, ccpaX-^ sacpaXxa • (pav-y 7ti(payxoL 
iS 4. 4). 

4. In the perfect, active and passive, and 
some other tenses of dissyllabic verbs, s of the 
root is changed into a ; axsX-^ eaxaXxa^ eaxaX^ 
fxacy laxaXov^ iaxdXrfv^ iaxdXOijv • netg-y neg-j 
TtSTtagxa^ TteTtagfiaij indgOifv^ snagov^ indgrfv. 

5. These verbs want the later future in (Jco ; 
and the aorist in a they make without (T, length-^ 
ening a of the root into rj or d, and s into ei ;, 

6 



70 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



oziXkcjj root (TTfA-, Ear. Fut. oTfAfo, Ear. Aor. 
eaxaXov^ Lat. Aor. earsiXa • (paivto^ root ^ai/-, 
Fut. (pavio^ Ear. Aor. s(pavov, Lat. Aor. ecprfi^a. 

6. The verbs xgivco, xXivco^ xtslvcOj thvo^ 
Ttkvvo make the following tenses. 



XSXQLXa 


xsKQLfiai ixgr&Tjv 


xskXihoc 


TcexXi^ 


cti inX 


l&TjV 


I'xTwxa 


exTafiav ixTci'&rjv 


Tcraxce 


TSTafiai ha 


^7}V 


nenkvxa ninlv^ab inkv&tjv. 




7. Example 


\ axiXXco. 






Active. 


Passive. 


Middle. 


Imp. Pres. 


atikkcj 


ojeXX-oiiiai, 




Imp. Past 


e-atsXkov 


i-OTsXX-6^7JV 




Ear. Perf. Pres. 


s-oToX-a 


e-OTdX-uai 




Ear. Perf. Past 


£-oj6X-slv 


i-0TdX-fi7^v 




Lat. Perf. Pres. 


t-araX-xa 






Lat. Perf. Past 


i-ojdX-xuv 






Ear. Fut. 


OTsX-ico 


aTaX-T^aofiat 


OTeX-sofAat 


Ear. Aor. 


e-GTaX-ov 


i-GTciX-TjV 


i-araX-6fi7}V 


Lat. Aor. 


B-aisiX-a 


i-aTdX-&r}v 


i-OTuX-d^r^v 


Lat. Fut. 




ataX-&rjoofiaL 




Perf. Fut. 




l-oxdX-oo^cti 





Examples for practice, cpaivco^ aneigoy xpdX- 
Xco, (pdaigco. 

^ 49. INFLEXION OF TENSES. 

1. Each tense may be divided into three 
parts, viz. tense root^ mood^ vowel, and termi- 
nation ; as in eTi/i/>a?, hvip is the tense root or 
that part which is not changed by inflexion in 
the various modes, a indicates the mood, and 
6 the number and person, tvuxo^sv^ xvtcx tense 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 71 

root, Lid. mood-vowel^ {xsv the first person plu- 
ral termination. 

2. The forms of the tenses, in the first per^ 
son singular of the indicative, being known 
from the preceding rules, the student has only 
to vary the vowel for the mood, and the per- 
sonal terminations, in order to inflect the verb 
throughout. 

^50. MOOD VOWELS. 

Sing. Dual- Plur. 

Pers. 12 3 12 3 12 3 
Ind. OSS OSS s o 
Subj. o Tf rf CD 7f Tf o rf o. Vowels of the 

Ind. lengthened. 
Opt. 01. Imp. s. Inf. s. Part. o. 

^51. TERMINATIONS. 

1. The tenses maybe divided into two class- 
es ; leading or primary tenses, consisting of the 
present and future tenses {rvTtxco, xsTvcpa, ti/- 
i/yo), and the secondary tenses, consisting of 
the past (sTVTtrov^ ervxpa, hsxvcpsLv). These 
different classes of tenses have different termi- 
nations. They are, in general, as follows. 

2. Primary Tenses. 

Active Voice. Passive Voice. 

Sing, ^i ai, 6 n, at fiac (jut xa^ 

Dual fisv xov xov fiedov oOov adov 

Plur. [isv xs vxi^vai [xsdcx. ads vxai 



72 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Secondary Tenses. 

Active Voice. Passive Voice. 

Sing. V a — fXTjv 6o to 

Dual ^uv Tov T7p i^iedov adov adjjv 

Plur. fxsv TS davj v [.csda ode vzo 

3. The subjunctive has, both in the active 
and passive, the terminations of the primary 
tenses of the indicative, and the optative those 
of the secondary tenses. 

4. Imperative. 

Active. Passive. 

Sing. di TO ao ado 

Dual TOV TOV adov odov 

Plur. TB Tcoaav a&€ odoaav 

5. Infinitive vat. Part. vr. 

§ 52. MOOD-VOWELS AND TERMINA-" 
TIONS COMBINED. 

1. Indicative Mood. 

In the active voice the terminations fii and ac 
(1 and 3 Pers. Sing, primary tenses) fall away, 
and the mood-vowel of the singular is length- 
ened from OSS into co ei sc. 

Primary Tenses. 

Active. Passive. 

S. o- £t'S St' 0'f.taL s-aat s-jai 

D. O'lxBv S'Tov e-Tov O'usdov S'Odov s-adov 

P. O'^sv S'le O'vac^ovac) o-f^uda s-ods o-vxai 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 73 

Secondary Tenses. 

Active. Passive. 

D. O'fjLSv S'TOv e-TTiv o-fjisBov e-aOov e-aOrfv 
P. O'fxav e-TS o-v o-^eOa a-aOe o-vto. 

! 2. Subjunctive Mood. 

In the 2 and 3 Pers. Sing., the mood-vowel 
€L of the indicative goes into jf. 

Active. Passive. 

S. o- Tf'S Tf' O'fiai Tf-aac Tf-jat 

D. O'fiev ri'Tov rj'TOv o-fisOov rj-adov rf-aOov 

P. o-fiev ri'TS cO'vaL^coat) o-fisOa rj-aOe o-vxai. 

3. Optative Mood. 
In the Active retains [xl for termination in 
the 1 Pers. Sing. ; in the 3 Pers. Plur. takes fv 
instead of v. 

Active. Passive. 

S. oi'iii ot-s ot' oL'fzrfv ot-ao ot-xo 

D. oL-fjcev oC'Tov oC'Trfv ot-fxedov oi-adov ot-adi^v 

P. OL-fxev oL'Xe ot-sv oc-fxeda oc-aOe ol-vto. 

4. Imperative Mood. 
The active 2 Pers. Sing, drops Ol. 

Active. Passive. 

S. f- B'To S'Cfo a-aOo 

D. €'Tov e-Tov s-adov s-adav 

P. e-Ts e-Tcoaav s-ods S'Odo(yav (or eaOcov). 

5. Infinitive. Active e-vai^s-v), h-v. Passive 

6. Participle. Active o-vt (av, ^ 26. 2). Pas- 
sive o-fxevos. 

6* 



bmg. 
Dual 


(0 

ofiev 


STOV 


STOV 


Pliir. 


ousv 


€T8 


ovai. 



74 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

7. The above is a general view of the regu- 
lar forms. There are, however, some excep- 
tions in both voices, and the active is less reg- 
ularly developed than the passive. We pro- 
ceed to give an example of the above with the 
exceptions. 

V53. ACTIVE CONJUGATION. kecTto}. 

L Indicative. 
Primary Tenses. 

Imp* Pr. Xslno) 
Ear. Fut. XL7ts(o 
Lat. Fut. kelipoi 

Exc. Perf. Pres. mood-vowel a, 3 Sing. e. 
Terminations reg. 

Ear. Perf. Uloma ) n i " ^^ 

T i. T> r 1 '1 \ JJual auiv ciTov aiov 

JLiat. reri. IslsLcpa i t>i * / - \ 

^ \ rlur. (Xfisv axe avat, {^aaL) 

Secondary Tenses^ 

Imp. Past eXsinov ) yx fi ^^ ^ 

Ti ^ . ,„ < Dual ousv STOV sttjv 

Ear. Aor. sXinov J t>i _ * 

I rlur. ofisv sts ov 

Exc. 1. Perf. Past mood- vowel si. Termi- 
nation 3 PI. aav. 

Ear. Perf. Past ilskolnsiv ( yv^fi* ^'^ ^'^ 

T n r T> i. 31 1 f \ JJual SLUSV SLTOV SLTfjV 

Lat. reri. Past sAsIslcoslv i t», ^ ^^ 

^ \ Plur. sLfisv SLT8 sioav or soar. 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, 3 Sing. s. 
Termination 1 Sing, wanting. 

r Sing, a 
Lat. Aor. fcVy(//a < Dual a^isv 
( Plur. a^sv 



ccg 


s 


aTov 


dTTjV 


axE 


(XV, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 75 

2. Subjunctive, 

Imp. Pr. Xunta 1 

Ear. Perf. Xskolnco Sing, w jjg t] 

Lat. Perf. XeXelq)bj J>Dual ainev tjtov tjtov 

Ear. Aor. Una) f Plur. cofiev tjts (ovgl {coat), 

Lat. Aor. Xslipco j 

^ 3. Optative. 

! Imp. Pr. Xuitoifii ') 

j Ear. Perf. XeXolnoiui 1 c?. _ 

Lat. Pert. XeXdwoiui [ t\ } 

Ear. Fut. XineoiuL f di , ' 

Jbiar. Aor. Xlnoifii, | '^ 

Lat. Fut. XdifJoiixL j 

Exc. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel at. 

SSing. a/^t «(? «t 
Dual ai^sv aiTov ccIttjv 
Plur. af^fv ccns aiev, 

4. Imperative. 

Imp. Pr. Xslns 1 q- ^ 

Ear Perf.Pr.mo,;rJS"^- ' "" 

Lat. Perf. AtAftops ) d, , /„„ i / x 

Ear. Aor. Xlns i^^""'' "* 6Ta,(i«.(and o.tco.). 

Exc. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, 2 Sing. ov. 

/ Sing, ov ciio) 
Lat. Aor. Xetipov < Dual aiov arwy 

( Plur. aTS diojoav, 

5. Infinitive. 

Imp. Pr. XdnsLV 
Ear. Fut. Xmisiv 
Ear. Aor. Xinslv 
Lat. Fut. XsiipsLv, 

Exc. L Perf. original termination, vac. Ear. 
Perf. XaXoLTtkvaL^ Lat. Perf. XeXucpivai. 



76 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Exc. 2. Lat, Aor. mood-vowel a, termina- 
tion L. Xetxpai. 

6. Participles. 

Imp. Pr. Xdnovxl 

Ear. Fut. hniovx I 

Ear. Aor. W,^ f"" ''^''« '>"' 

Lat. Fut. Ae/j/zoyj 3 

Exc. 1. Perf. mood-vowel o, termination t. 

Earlier form X^XomoT ) / \ / 

Later form AsAs/^cSt / ("^^^ ^^ ^^" "^• 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a. Xaxpavx 
XetxpavTS Xeixpas^ aca, ucv. 

^ 54. PASSIVE CONJUGATION. 

1. The four middle tenses have regular pas- 
sive forms, and are therefore included in the 
passive conjugation. 

2. Both the passive aorists belong to an old 
form of conjugation without mood-vowels. They 
will be explained hereafter. 

3. The perfects present and past attach the 
terminations to the root without mood-vowels. 

§ 55. 1. Indicative. 
Primary Tenses. 

Imp. Pr. Xslnoixat^ 

Ear. Fut. Pass. Xmrioouai c- / v 

Lat. Fut. Pass. XsLw&rjaouon \ ri i ' a a a 

Perf. r ut. XsXuipojiaL f m ^ « 



Ear. Fut. Mid. Xineofiat, 
Lat. Fut. Mid. Xdipo^m 



Plur. o/uc^a €ff^€ 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 77 

Exc. Perf. Pr. no mood-vowel. 

Sing. iBUin-nai {IsXeLfifiaL) XeXun-aai {UXenpac) 

XeXsm-TocL 
Dual kslsln-fie&ov {ldsl^^£&ov) X8XH7i-a'&ov{keXei(p&ov§i.U) 

XsXhtI'G&ov (XeXsLCp&ov) 
Plur. Xdsln-fxs&a {XeXslfi^s&a) XsXsin-ad^s (XeXsKf&s) 

XiXsinvzai.* 

Secondary Tenses. 

, T» .. ' ( Sinff. ouriV BOO (eo, ov) ero 

Ear. Aor. M. ehnofiriv | p,^^ .^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ 

Exc. 1. Perf. Past no mood-vowel. 

Sing. iXdeln-firiv iXeXein-oo iXiXsiTr-ro 

fi-f^r}v ipo 

Dual iXtXdn-^E&ov iXeXmi-o^ov iXeXtln-a&tiV 

fi-^£&ov (p-&ov (f-d^rjv 

Plur. iXeXelfifis&a iXsXsiq^^s (iXeXeinvjo) XeXsi^^evoi '^oav. 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel a. 



Lat. Aor. 


C Sing. tt/iTjv aoo {ao, w) 
M. fXBuijdfiTjv < Dual dfis^ov ao&ov 
I Plur. dfit&a ao^e 

2. Subjunctive. 


aro 

do&riv 

avTO. 


Imp. Pr. 
Ear. Aor. 
Lat. Aor. 


Ac/TTw^tt^ ) Sing, w^at rioaL {riai, p) 
M. XiTKOfiai > Dual wjiis&ov rjo&ov 
M. Xelifjw^ai ) Plur. wne&a rja&s 


rjo&ov 
(avtai. 


Exc. 


Perf. Pr. XfXsifjfxsvog w jig g 
Dual XeXtifjisvo) w^sv rixov r^iov 
Plur. XtXeii^i^syoc wf^ev ^le (ovoi (wat). 



* An impossible form ; hence XiXi/V«r«i or XtXti^areu (§11. 8), and 
more commonly kiXttf/fiifot c/V/. 



78 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



3. Optative. 



Imp. Pr. Ismol^riv 

Ear. Fut. P. XmrjoolfiTiv 
Lat. Fut. P. XsL(p&r]ooifirjv 
Perf. Fut. leXsnifolfiTjv 
Ear. Fut. M. Xmiol^rjv 
Ear. Aor. M. hnolfir^v 
Lat. Fut. M. Xsiiijolfirjv 



Sing. olfiTjV oiao {oto) oiro 
>Dual olue^ov oiod^ov ola&7]v 
Plur. olfxed^a oia&e oivio* 



Exc. 1. Perf, Pr. IsXeifiixsvog el'rjv sl'rjg bVt] 

Dual XsksLfifisvta slrjijiev b17]tov slrjTtiv 
Plur. XsXsLfifisvoL eVriijisv slrirs slriaav, 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel at. 



Lat. Aor. M. Uixp-alfiriv 
Dual alfiE&ov 

Plur. alfisd^ct 



mo mxo 

aia&ov alod^rjv 
aiod^e mvTO, 



4. Imperative. 

T -n ^ r C Sinff. ov ia&ci 

Imp. rr. Isltisoo, so, ov J n.^i n r /, 

Ear. Aor. M. Ameao, eo, ov i t>i.,^ n f « 

1 rlur. sa&s sa&aoav. 



Exc. 1. Perf. Pr. UXsL7i-'Go{ipo) 
Dual XsksLq)&ov 
Plur. Xsksicp&e 



XsXsln-a&tt) {XeXslq)-'&a)) 

XsXslcp&bJV 

XtXdcpd^woav, 



Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel a. 

Lat, Aor. M. Xslip-cti dod^o), Dual «ai9^oy (!ia&(ov, Plur. aa^£ 



5. Infinitive. 6. Participle. 



Imp, Pr. 
Ear. Fut. P. 
Lat. Fut. P. 
Perf. Fut. 
Ear Fut. M. 
Ear. Aor. M. 
Lat. Fut. M. 



XelnEO&ai> 

XiTii^oeo&aL 

Xsicpd^i^aso&oci 

XsXslipfo&ai 

Xinssa&at 

XiTiea&ai' 

XBLipso&ai, 



Xsmofisvog 

Xinrjooiisvog 

Xsicp&rjGOfisvog 

XsXstipofitrog 

Xmsof^EVog 

XiTtof^isvog 

Xsiipoixsvog. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 79 

Exc. Exc. 

Lat. Aor. M. Xuipaod^ai Xeiipd^svog 

Perf. Pr. XsUln-o^ai, XsXsi^ixivog» 

% 6Q. PERFECTS PRESENT AND PAST. 
FURTHER EXAMPLES. 

1. Pure verbs attach the terminations easily 
to the root, and make the 3 PL without the 
participle. q)ilio^ TteqjiXrjfiaL. 

Sing. TftKpllTjficxi 7if<piXrioaL nsqiiXTjTou 

Dual TTscpiXrj^e&ov ns^lXr^o&ov mcflXrja&ov 

Plur. ne<pLXrifj.e&a mcplXtio^t nicflXrivxou* 

Perf. Past ijisq>iXrj-ixrjv ao to 

Dual intcpiXrj-fxsdov ad^ov od^riv 

Plur. i7i8q)iXTJ-fie&a a&s yjo. 

Liquid verbs. acpaXXco^ sacpaXfiaL. 

Sing. tacpaX-^ui oai lai, 

Dual iacpaX-fxtd^ov a&ov(^&or) a&ov{&ov) 

Plur. iaq)(iX-^e^a a&£{&e) {vtul) iocpaXfiivoi dah, 

Perf. Past io(f)dX-^i]v ao to, ^c. 

Lingual mutes. netOoy ninetd-fLat (niueia- 
fiat). 

Sing.7Tt7i£i-d^fiai,{oiiiai) '&oai{ocii) ^Tai(aTat) 

Dual 7i6nsi-S^fisd^ov{aiii£&ov) ■&a&or{o&ov) ^o^ov{a^ov) 
Plur. n6nBl-&^s&a{ofiSx>a) '&a'&£{o&£) {^vjai) nsnsiGfiiyoi 

[elolv. 

Examples for practice, kiksyfiai^ Sedijkofiac, 
nscpav-fxai, TaTgL^^iai^ ^jwr-fxai. 



80 



INTKODUCTION TO THE 



§ 57. SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 

Active 





Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperf. Pres. 


Xeln(o 


Xiln(o 


Imperf. Past 


eksiTtov 




Ear. Perf. Pres. 


XiXoma 


XsXolnoi 


Ear. Perf. Past 


iXskolnsiv 




Lat. Perf. Pres. 


UXucpa 


XsXelqxo 


Lat. Perf. Past. 


iXsXsi<f>eiv 




Ear. Future 


Xmifa 




Ear. Aorist 


sXlttov 


Xlnw 


Lat. Future 


Xslipta 




Lat. Aorist 


BXBiijja 


Xdip(a 

Passive 


Imperf. Pres. 


Xslnofiac 


XslnonfiaL 


Imperf. Past 


iXsL7i6fir}v 




Perf. Pres. 


XsXsLfifxaL 


XsXsifZfiivog c3 


Perf. Past 


iXsXslfifirjv 




Ear. Future 


Xntrioo^av 




Ear. Aorist 


eXlnrjv 


Xinoi 


Lat. Future 


Xstxp&i^aofiaL 




Lat. Aorist 


iXelcp&r^v 


XsLCp&^ 


Perf, Future 


XeXdipo^ai 


Middle 


Ear. Future 


Xmio^av 




Ear. Aorist 


iXi7i6}ii]v 


Xlntafjiai, 


Lat. Future 


Xslipoixai 




Lat. Aorist 


iXsupdfiTjv 


Xsli/j(ofiac 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



81 



THE MOODS AND 


TENSES. 




Voice. 








Optative. 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 


XdnoifiL 


Xeins 


Xdnuv 


Xdntav 


XsXolnoifiL 


XiXomB 


XsXomivai 


XeXomcig 


XeXslcpoifiL 


XsXevq)S 


XsXsKpevaL 


XeXsiq)Ojg 


XmioifiL 
Xlnoi^i 
Xeii^oiixt 
XelipocifiL 


XItts 
Xslipov 


XtniELV 
Xiniiv 
XdipHv 
Xetipai 


Xiniioy 
Xinoiv 
Xdipoav 
Xdipag, 


Voice. 








XemolfiTjv 


Xdnov 


Xslnso&ai 


Xetnofievog 


XeXsi^fisvog ei'rjv 


XeXeiipo 


XtXdcp&av 


XtXHUfxivog 


XlTtTjaolflTlV 

XiTtdrjv 
XeL(p&r^aolfii]V 
Xeicp&siriv 
XeXsiipolfiTiv 


Xlnrj^L 
Xdcp&riTL 


Xini^asa&ai 

Xmr^vai 

XeLq)&i^oea&ai, 

Xsicp&rjvai 

XeXdipso&ai 


Xmriaofievog 

Xmdg 

Xsiqi&Tjoofisvog 

Xeiq>^slg 

XsXeiyjofievog. 


Voice. 








Xmtol^riv 
Xcnolfitjv 
XuxpolfLtiv 
Xuxpal^riv 


Xmov 
Xuxpai 


Xinisa&at 
Xmia^dL 
Xslipsod^at 
Xdipaad^ai 


XiTiBofisvog 
XiTtofiivog 
Xsiipofisvog. 
Xeiipdfievog 



82 



INTBODUCTION TO THE 



PARADIGM 



Active 





Indicative. 




Subjunctive 


, 


Imp. Pres. 


Xii^'U 


its 


it 


>.g/V-« 


V^ 


V 


/ am leaving, or 


CfAiV 


«T«y 


irov 


(OfJt.tV 


nrev 


nnv 


I leave. 


CfliV 


in 


evffi 


CJfJt.IV 


fin 


bXft 


Imp. Past. 


'iXii^'OV 


i$ 


i 








/ was leaving. 


OfJttV 


irav 
tn 


srm 

ev 








Ear. Perf. Pres. 


XiXotTT-a 


as 


8 


XiXoi^-u 


ViS 


V 


I have left. 


CtfAiV 


KTOV 


arov 


UfAiV 


urov 


urov 




afiiv 


ars 


act 


eof/,iv 


vn 


OJfft 


So Lat. Perf. Pres. 


XiX-iKP'O, 


as 


g, &C. 


kikit^-ea 


1?S 


9,&^c. 


Ear. Perf. Past 


iXtXoi^'tiv 


US 


it 








I had left. 


tlfAiV 


urov 


iirvjy 










tIfitiV 


stri 


tiffav 


or iffav 






So Lat. Perf. Past 


IXeXs/ip-g/v 


its 


Uy &C. 








Ear. Fut. 


Xi'Ti'M 


us 


u* 






1 


/ shaU leave. 


efAiv 


trov 
in 


trov 
eufft 








Ear. Aor. 


«Xisr-«y 


is 


i 


Xicr-u 


fIS 


V 


Heft, 


efAt¥ 


srov 


injv 


UfAiV 


urov 


urov 




OfAiV 


in 


cv 


UfJLiV 


fin 


Ufft 


Lat. Fut. 


A tiyj/~u 


us 


u 






\ 


/ shall leave. 


•fJCtV 


irov 


irov 








OfAiV 


tn 


OVffl 






i 


Lat. Aor. 


sktf4/-a 


as 


' 


Xiiy)/-ai 


fIS 


V 


Ilefi, 


afAiV 


arov 


arnv 


UfliV 


urov 


urov 




afiiv 


an 


av 


UfJLiV 


fin 


Ufft 



* Commonly contracted in the active and middle ; as >»/t*>, Xt^iTsy Xi- 
TiT, XiTiTrov, See, See § 59. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



83 



OF Xdnta, 








Voice. 






Optative. 


Imfebativis. 


Infin. 


Participle. 


Xll^-etfn 01 s §1 


XiT'T-i irat 


kU^tdV 


Xut-uv evra cf 


etfJLU otrtv oiTfiv 


trov ircay 




avrof euff-fis owns 


ttfjtt* etrt «tif 


tri iTuo'ecp 







XiXsiT-Ufit ets »i 

»ifii¥ «/<r09 eirfif 



Xikoi^-i iroii XiXotiripat 

troy irf¥ 
in irojfotv 
kikii^t iTM,&cAktXtt^iveu 



ktkoiT'Ais cmVk i§ 

§r9f viaf ir$f 

klkuP'tis v7a OS 

iros viotf or OS 



klTl'Otfjtl 


Oi( ot 






ktwiu 


01 ft lit 


otrof olrnv 








OlfAlf 


otri oitv 








klT-OI/JLl 


OiS 01 


klx-t 


Wa, 


kt^iiv 


OtfAlV 


otrov otrttf 


trof 


truf 




OtfAlV 


oirt till 


trt 


iruo'av 





\ktxi-uv ovffoe. ov 

ovros ouffus ovrof 



^kt^-tiv oZffa ov 
\ ovros ovfftiS ivrog 



klf\J/'0/f4,t OiS Oi 

otfjiiv oirov olrfi)t 
oifJLiv oirt oitv 



kti^iiv Iktiyp'uv ovfot o¥ 

I oyres oufftis ovros 



ku^-atfAi ecis ui [kii-^^'OV arv Ikttyf/eti 
etifitv airov airtiv^ etrof are^v 

aifnv airt anv \ an drtf^etf 



kti^p'Us eto'a ecv 

etvros arris ctyrog 



84 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



PARADIGM 



Imp, Pres. 
I am {being) left 
(relinquor). 



Indicative. 
kii^-oftm »i srai 

ofjbiffa iffh ovrat 



Passive 

Subjunctive. 



Imp^ Past 
/ was (being) left 
(relinquebar). 






eu iro 

iffh oyro. 



Perf. Pres. 
/ am or have been left 
(relictus sum). 



fAfJUSa, (ph fAfAiVOi 



XiXtifAfAsyof ufAiv firov rirov 



Perf. Past 
/ was or had been left 
(relictus eram). 



/A/AS^ov <pdov (p6yiv I 

fAfA%6» <ph ^tkSt'fAfAUot 



Ear. Fut. 
/ shall be left. 



IXt^no'-ofAeu fj srut 
OfAiSov i<r6ov ifffiov 
I OfAi^et itrh evTAi 



Ear. Aor. 
I was left. 


n/Aiv 




UfAlV 


tin 


affi 


Lat. Fut. 
I shall be left. 


XU^^n^'OfAKI 

ifAi&ov 
efAi6cA 


ri %r»t 

Iff&OV Iff&OV 




Lat. Aor. 
I was leji. 




VS 91 

9i7t jjrav 


a/fAiv 
eHfAiv 


2?? 
vrov 


V 

Uffl 


Perf. Fut. 
/ shall have been left. 


Xikti^p'OfAm 

CfAt^OV 


•» treet 
tff6ov tff&OV 









STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



85 



OF Uln(a, 






Voice. 




Optative* 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. Participle. 


XUTf'oifAYiV 010 OiTO 


Xti^-eu iffiai 


kii^iff^at XwsrifAi^os 


oifiihv oio-hv oiff6fiv 


iff^of iff^uv 


1 


oifAt^et eiffh otVT0 


iffh ia-^M^ecf 





XiXufAfiivM iififAtf t7fiTov urimf ^^o* <piant 




XiXli)AfA%US 















Xi9rn^'olfAnv 

OifAl^OV 

oifAt^ec 


Of 


OtTO 

oiff^nv 

OtVTO 


Xt^nnw^eu 


XtTflO-OfltfOf 


Xiiru'nv 

flfAtV 

fIfAtV 


tjrof 

fITi 


fl 


XiTtl'^i TO* 


Xtxnvtu 


XtTtii 


Xu(phff'OifAriv 
oifJLihv 
oifii^et 


010 

otfhv 
oiffh 


OiTO 

oiff^viv 
otvro 


Xu^^nffiff^eti 


Xtl^^fl^OfAffOf 


Xu^hi-fif 

flfitv 


US 

fITOV 

art 


9} 

ntretv 


Xttip^fj-Tt Tea 

T09 TUV 

Ti rufotit 


Xn^^fjvai 


Xu(p6us 


XiXiiy]/-OifAf)v 
oifit^ov 
olfAi^tt 


010 

otaSov 
otwh 


otro 

otfffinv 

otvro 




XiXtiyptffiett 


XtXU^OfAi¥§$ 



7* 



m 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



PARADIGM 



MiDDLB 





Indicative. 




Subjunctive. 




Ear. Fut.- 


oficihv 


V 


irett 

iff6ov 
ovrcci 








Ear. Aor. 


lA/flr-fl^i?v 


cv 


iro 


y.W-UfJLCtl 


V 


ViTOCi 




e/ct&ov 


iff6ov 


iffhv 


uffjiihv 


Hff^ev 


viir&o)) 




ofjLi^a 


iirh 


OVTO 


Ufi.i6a. 


fiffh 


&fVTect 


Lat. Fut. 




Btrhv 
icrh 


irat 

iffhv 
ovroci 








Lat. Aor. 


iXuyp'oiit/,nv 


u 


etro 


Xil-^-OffjtBU 


V 


nrai 




d/xi^ev 


ocffSov 


affSviv 


UfJt.i&OV 


nffhv 


>]trhv 




ocfAiSa 


affh 


ctvro 


u(Jt,i&oe. 


rtffh 


uvrat j 



[ Indic. 
Imp. Pres. (rriXXu 
Imp. Past 8(r<r£XXflv 

Ear. Perf. Pr. 'ivrdXa 
Ear. Perf. Past laroXuv 



SYNOPSIS OF THE | 



Active. 



SUBJ. 

ffri\Xtt 



Optat, ! Imper. 
ffriXkoifAi ffTtXks 



iffroXu ]i<rToX.oifAi 



t<rT9Xi 



Infin. I Part, 
erriXkuy ffTSkka/y 

I 



Lat. Perf. Pr. scrrakxa Iffrakxat iffroikKoifAt sffvetkxi lo'Takxiveet io-raXxug 
Lat. Perf. Past itmtXKuv \ 

tTTtXeotfiti 



Ear. Fut. ffTtXiat 

Ear. Aor. \s<rTakov 

Lat. Aor. iio-ru^a 



ffraXof 

<rrukc» 



ffTilkotlfAt [ffTtiXoV 



ffTSTXut 



tf-TsXsA/y 
ffraXuf 
CTtiXas 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



87 



OF Xsl7i6). 



Voice. 



Optative. 

oifjt.i6o¥ oioioy 
oifAi6ee, otffii 


OtT9 

oiff6fiv 

OtVTO 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 

XlTtOfJilfOS 


Xt^'Ctfitny 
e'tfjii0oy 


MO 

otffhv 

Oiff&l 


OiTO 

o'tffivif 

OtfTO 


Xtr-ou 
tff^^oy 


%v6ot^ 
io6uff9Ly 


Xicriff^at 


XjTOfAtVOS 


oifAi^at 


010 

oiffSov 
otffh 


otro 
oiv§fi^ 

0lfT» 






Xityl/ia^eu 


XuypOfAivof 



Xii\p-aifji,n9 ato euro Xit'^-oti aa^u XiiypetJ^ett 



Xll^KfJLtVOf 



LIQUID VERB axaUu 



Passive. 

Indic. I SuBj. Opt at. 

ffriXXufji.aLi ffTiXkoifjcriv 



Impee. Infin. 

frikXou ffriXXtaScti 



I Part. 
trriXXofAivos 



Imp. Pr. ffTiWofjLOLt 

Imp. Past IcrriXXofjtrw 

Perf.Pr. iirTOLXfjt.at %ffra.XfAifOi\araXfciifit1'tffraX<ro ivraXSeti ifraXfiUos 

Perf. Past lirriiX/xnif I [<« [»J» | 

Ear. Fut. (rrak^trofzati ' ffretXfia-oifAtif I ffraXYtrir6au &T»XnffifAiyes 

Ear. Aor. io-retXnv aretXa ffrxXiinv ffraXn^t ffrecXvjvezt araXiis 

Lat. Fut. ffTit'k&rwQfJLin ffTtxX^fjo'oifz.fir ffrtt.Xifi(ri(r§at ffroc\6fi^ofAtv§$ 

Lat. Aor. UrecX^nv araX^ea ffrctXh'mf IffriX&nri ^rccX^ri^eci CTuXhig 

Pert. Pr. iffreiXo-ofjcat ia-Takg-oifcrff j iffroiXa-iff^cti io'TccXo'ougfos 

Middle. 



Ear. Fut. I tf-TcXsd^ci | '^riXsoifinf I ^ffriXhff^ati 

Ear. Aor. UraXofjiinv ffTaXufAoti <rr(tXoi/u,t}v irrecXoZ ^trrttX^aGoLi 
Lat. Aor. i(rT£/Xa^>j» vriiXafjuon ^ruXxi/Ativ vri7Xon {ffruXocffSen 



^TiXlO/lltfOS 

^CTxXe' fits fog 



ffTiiXec,fjc.tvo$ 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



§ 58. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 

The middle voice reflects the action back 
immediately or remotely on the agent ; as, xi;- 
TiTOfiaL^ I strike myself^ (pyXdrxofiaLj I guard my- 
self. Along with the tenses peculiar to the 
middle, the imperfects and perfects present and 
past of the passive are often used in this sense. 
The following, then, is a complete scheme of 
the middle. 





Indic. 


Sdbj. 


Optat. 


Imper. 


Infin. 


Part. 


Imp. Pr. 


raffffofiot.1 


raffffufAai 


raffffoifAnv 


riirffov 


reifffi^fictt 


Tua-ff-ef/tvof 


Imp. Past 


ireto'crofAijv 












Perf. Pr. 


TtrayfAai 


TtrtiyfAivts u 


rtrttyf^ifos it- 


rir»l« 


Tireip^6at 


viruyfAivet 


Perf. Past 


irirayfAnv 




W 








Ear. Fut. 


rayiofiat 




recytoi/AUV 




rayiirfiitt 


recytofAtvdg 


Ear. Aor. 


iTuyifiyiv 


roiyvfiKt 


retytifctjy 


retyou 


retyiwiut 


rayofttves 


Lat. Fut. 


Tu^aficett 




Ta^9ifit1¥ 




^eil^ifitti 


ret^cfitivof 


I^t. Aor. 


Ira^dfAnv 


ru^u fleet 


Ta^uiftnt 


rei^eet 


ragar^ai 


ree^eifAtvds 



§ 59. CONTRACTED TENSES. 

1. The Imperf. Pres. and Past of dissyllabic 
verbs in ao, a«, and oco, are contracted in the 
active and passive voices, and the Ear. Fut. 
active and middle of mute and liquid verbs. 
The contractions are mainly subject to the rules 
Jaid down in § 8. They are as follows. 

2. In verbs in aoj, a before an o sound (ao, 
uo^ aov, and aoi) is contracted into a and (as 
In aoi) into «; a before an f sound (as, a?/, aa, 
uy) into a and (as in an and ajf) a ; as, rtixcLo 

TLfx6, TlfldoifJit TLfJLSfJily TL[ia€ TlflU, Tlfxdrf Tifld^ Tt- 

jxdet Tifid. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



89 



3. Verbs in so contract €€ into et, and so into 
ov ; as, (piXes (piXn^ q)iXiofji€v (piXovfiev • other- 
wise, they drop s; as, (ptlio) (piXS, (piXiotfii 
(piXolfiL^ (pLXksLv cpiXuv. 

4. Verbs in oco contract os and oo into ov ; 
as StfXosTs dyjXovzSj 8rfX6o[,isv SrfXovfiev • o before 
o, 01, ov is lost ; as SrfXoo dtfXco^ SrfXooi SrfXot^ 
StfXoov StfXov ' before rf it goes into co, as SriXo- 
7fT6 8rfXcoT€^ but before jf and £c into ot ; as 5?^Ao?? 
StfXoLj StfX6€c SrjXoL' except the Inf. ostv, which 
makes ovv ; as, StfXostv StfXovv. 



P« 

fa 

o 

xn 
^'■^ 
m 

Ph 

O 



o 

CO 



I *^ I It 

*5 h "Q-e. 



^ J? J? ^ 






I? 



ISC 



>S b 



^ <* « 

M M •« 

4J4 



vis 


b 


^4.g 


»5 


1 


1 








a 


^ 


«! 


v2 


bi 


^ 



> 



5 '5- 



g. 2. > 



.5. 





.2 


^ 


^^ 






a 




^ 


«a 


4 


^ 


^3 




*< 


^\» 


CO 


v2 




*< 









.3-^i- 






^^ 









S i. 



8 


S* 




1^ 


1. 




icj 


3 


<a 


2 


<< 


•^ 








1 


e- 
b 


0. 



la*^^ 



a *^ ^ 8 2 



|.v|- l-';^ .^ ^ v^ 



g g 4) 4j 3 O 
>H 1-4 P-l P-l pC4 <1 



« 1.1- 

.• M iT W ** »2 *J 

Pl( Pw J^ (1, Pm <^ Ps« 

C C 0) 0^ (^ eg v 

,^ )£ fu, PL, >:] h] ^ 



^15 



^< 



^ 
^ 



.s 
i 

re 



H 



I 

cS 

8 

o 



90 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Imperfect Present and Past of Ttfido). 

Indic. Subj. Oftat. Imp. Infi». Part. 

rtft-okot tJ aoj a doifjti e^fn At a duv csv d&>v uv, 

rtfA-dofiai ufAOLt avfAUi ufAtti ecotfAijy ufirv dou a/ dtff6ui ciir^ttt ao/Atvti ufitvof. 
iTifA^aofAtjy eifAtjy, 

Imperfect Present and Past of SrjXoG). 

otjX-ou Z eat Z ooifAi etfjtt ot eu euv ovv euv Sv. 

i^vk-oof §vv* 

inX-OOfAOH tVfAOtt OUfAKt UflCH CoifAIJV OtfAfl¥ OOU «U Olir$Ut »Vff6a$ 90fJt,i¥0S ^VflSVOg, 

^ 61. TENSES WITHOUT MOOD-VOW- 
ELS (OR VERBS IN p). 

1. Some verbs with monosyllabic roots in a, 
f, 0, and others which attach vv or vvv, form 
three tenses, viz. the imperfect present and 
past active and passive, and the earlier aorist 
active and middle, without mood-vowels ; as, 
from roots ds So aia. dsfiev Sofxev 6xdiievj in- 
stead of Oiofiev Soofxsv ajdofiev. 

2. These tenses incline to the full original 
terminations ; as, Pr. Ind. Act. Sing, fit^ tr, ac ; 
2 Sing. Imp. 6t ; 2 Sing. Ind. Pass, oat ; Inf. 
Act. vai. Their terminations are otherwise gen- 
erally like those of verbs with mood-vowels. 

3. In the imperfects present and past, active 
and passive, they prefix to the root the initial 
consonant with t, except that to roots begin- 
ning with TTT, (TT, or a vowel, a rough l only is 
prefixed ; as. So StSo, da jtde, ara laxa^ i te. 



A 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 91 

The aorist prefixes the augment regularly to 
the root ; as 0f, edrfv. 

§ 62. ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. Indicative. 

Terminations. 
Imp. Pr. fit (J at D. (iBv Tov tov P. fisv ts vol. 
Past V (J — (iBv TOV Ttfv fiev ts aav^v. 

The radical vowel is lengthened in the sin- 
gular ; as 

ri6-nfji.t riff vjfft D. sfAiv trov irov P. ifAiv in ivfft (rthlfft), 

^J^* " J jjy VIS *i ifAiv troy irvjp ifjctv erg zffocv (or iv). 

2. Subjunctive. 

The Subjunctive has its regular mood-vov^el, 
which it contracts with the radical vowel, ojy 
going into co and ari into ?/, not into ol and a. 

ri&'iea Z Iris ^s % ^ D» S6;^fy ufAiv trirov yjrov tnrov vjrov P. sof/utsv ufAiv 

\jriri TJn iuffi Zvt* 

^ih-OU U Orie Zs 091 U D. OOJfJLiV UfAiV 09]r0y UTOV OriTdV UTOV p. eUftiV UfJLif 

[_09}Ti oJTi OUffi Uffl, 

3. Optative. 

L is added to the radical vowel, as Tudsi^ and 
71 inserted before the terminations of the sec- 
ondary tenses. 

I rthi-m us n D» rifciv firov tnrnv P. >j^sy jjre tjffav (sv).*' 

^ihoi-i^v ris rt nfAiv tirov nrnv rifAiv nr& tiffccv (sv). 

i * More commonly, D. nhTfcsf, rthlrot^ rJiirnv, P. nhT/ASv, vih7riy 



92 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

4. Imperative. 
Terminations dc to, tov tcov^ ts rcoaav. 

rUt-Tt TM J), Ttv ruv P. Ti ruffctf, 

5. Infinitive. 
Termination vac; as Ttdivatj SiSovai^ tivac^ 

Aor. decvat, Sovvatj elvac. 

6. Participle. 
Termination vt ; as, SlSo-vt (Sidovs ovaa oV), 
rtdS'VT {TLd£is)y SovT (dovs). 



^ 63 




FULL PARADIGM. 








1. TidifUL (ds). 








- 




Active. 

Imperfect Present. 








Ind. rU'itfAi US fifi 


D 


t/Atv trev trev P. 


tfAty 


trt 


i7fft 


Sub. rt^'fj J; ri 




ufitv nTov iJTOy 


at fit V 


nrt 


Ufft 


Opt Ti^-tm iins tin 




SiVfAtv unrov imrnv 


tiufity 


tinrt 


tinffecv 






^fAtv urot urtjv 


tTfAlV 


t7rt 


uty 


Imp. ri^-irt iru 




trev tray 


trt 


iruffay 


Inf. rJiveu Part. vi6iU. 














Imperfect Past. 








Ind. IrU'Yif fis fi 


D. 


SfAiv troy (rfiy P. 
Aorist. 


tfitV 


trt 


tffKV, 


Ind. ^^'fif *is « 


D. 


t/Atv troy irny P. 


tfAiy 


trt 


tffoiy 


Sub. ^-6/ yf f 




iJfAty firoy riroy 


ZfAiy 


nrt 


Uffl 


Opt. ^£/->jy m n 




rifAty firoy jjtjjv 


rifAty 


9}rt 


fl<rav 


Inop. ^£-f TAI 




roy ray 


rt 


ruffay 


Inf. ^iTvai Part. ^t/j. 













Passive. 

Ind. ri^-t/AUt t^at trat D. ifAtfioy ta6ov tffficy P. ifAiSa, t<rh tvrat 

Sub. ri6-ufjt,a.t ri tjrat ufAidoy fja^av fjff^oy 01(4.160, tjo'h ajyrmt 

Opt. ri6il-fAny ro fit6oy c&oy tr^ijy fii6ec ch vr* 

Imp. ri6-tffo tff^u t90oy iff6wy tffh iir0u<reLy 

Inf. rihff6ai Part. nfifAtyos. 



1 

4 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 93 

Imperfect Past. 
Ind. iriG-ifAviv tffo iro D. ifjt,ihv ta-hv U&nv P. ifAt^a tch i)>ro. 

Middle. 

Aorist. 

Ind. yl-fAfiv ffo TO D. fjCB^ov ffPov ff^rv P. fAS^a ffh vro 

Sub. 6-u[Aa.i 9? riTcti vftiht r,<r&o)t ijcrhv afAi^a tjffh uvrat 

Opt. hUfjtrtv TO fjLi&ov ff&ov ff6ftv fd,i^cc trh vro 

Imp, 0i-ffo{&ov) ff6u chii ff6ui/ ffh ff^utrav 

Inf. fia6ai Part. Sifjuvos* 

2. "^'lajrjfiL {ax a). 
Active. 

Pr. Ind. HffT'YifAi 9]( no't D« «^£v arey arov P. af/,iv an aert 
Sub. Iffru Opt. to'raifiv Imp. ^iffrcth Inf. Iffroivai Part. iVraj 
Imp. Past 'la'r-'vv us v T). oifiiv arov drnv P. u/u,iv an av or atrav 
Aor. «V<r>jy Sub. o-rai Opt. ffrainv Imp. ^rJj^i Inf. tf-rJJvai Part, c-raj* 

Pr. Ind. ^ffrafAai Sub. \ffrZftai Opt. Iffraif^ttiv Imp, *lffTafo Inf. *i<rraff6ai 
Past Iffra-fAnv ffo '70, &c. [Part. io-rd/^ivoS' 

Aor. Mid. ie'rafim Sub. crufiai Opt. (rraifAvtv Imp. (rratro Inf. ffraffGat 

[Part. <rrufji,ivosj,. 

3. z/t5«f<^ (5o). 

Pr. Ind. ^/^6;^i Sub. ^/^^w Opt. ^/^a/jjv Imp. ^/^<j^/ Inf. ^/^ava; Part. J/^ayr- 
Imp. l^/^-&;v &;j ^ D. fl^gy orov aT>?y P. a^gy ^rs «^ay 
Aor. Ind. 'iteov Sub. ^a> Opt. toWtV Imp. ^c? Inf. ^ayva; Part. ^ayj. 

Passive and Middle. 

Pr. Ind. ^i^ofiat Sub. ^t'^u/xat Opt. ^i^oifj(.nv Imp. ^/^^(rd Inf. ^itoaSai 
Past l^/^a^>}y [Part, ^i^of^zvos. 

Aor. M. |^fl^>?y Sub. ^&;^a/ Opt. ^fl/^>jy Imp. ^a^a Inf. ^flfl-^ai Part, ^fl^gvtfjo. 

4. JeLxvvfxL (defective). 
.Active. 

Imp. Pr. Ind. hUvu-fAt Imp. ^/ Inf. yat. Part, ywj 
Imp. Past ihixyvv. 

8 



94 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Passive. 

Pr. Ind. ^iiK)>v-fjL(ti Imp. tro Inf. ciett Part. fAtvas 
Past ihuxvvfinv* 

% 64. REMARKS- 

1. Several verbs form only the earlier aorist 
in this way ; as, ^aivco^ I gOy root ^a, Aor. 
e^Tfv • yiyvcDaxcoy root yvo^ Aor. eyvcov • 8vo^ 
eSvv. In these, the long vovi^els ?/, c?, and v are 
retained in all the numbers ; as e^rjaav. 

2. So the two aorists passive are formed, 
iXiTtTjv and iXsiq)drjv (tense-roots ihne and 
iXsLcpds), and retain the long vowel in the dual 
and plural. See paradigm of lecTtofiat. 

3. The other tenses of these verbs are reg- 
ular, except that the later aorist of jidr^fit, ^f^h 
8cd(0[jLiy has 7c; thus, edrixa idrfxdfirfv^ sSaxa iSco- 
xdfirjVy ^xa • and from 6s and I (xiOrffxt and 
LTifjLL) the Perf. Pr. is Tedsixa and ecxa. Aorists 
in xa are used only in the indicative, and there 
only in the Sing, and 3 Plur. 

4. Synopsis of irffxi^ to send, (root I). 

Active. 

Imp. Pr. Ind. mfAt Sub. tu Opt. htnv Imp. /s^/ Inf. livai Part, his 

Imp. Past y»jv and yr#v, Vot/v, (compounds l(piovv, u<piovv) 

Ear. Aor. riv u tlijy %$ tlveci us 

Fut. Tio-M no'o/firi nffuv nauv 

Lat. Aor. rixa 

Perf. Pr, iiKot tlxu lUoifAt tUivect ilxus 

Perf. Past lUu^. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



95 



Passive. 

Imp. Pr. hf/.ectt Imp. Past /s^jjv, Perf. Pr. iTfAxi Perf. Past ilfAnv, LaU 
Fut. y^ffofAou^ Lat. Aor. sV^jv, Perf. Fut. utro^ttu 

Middle. 





Ind. 


Sub. 


Opt. 


Imp. 


Inf. 


Part 


Ear. Aor. 


tfJ^r^y 


UfACtl 


tifjtnv 


iffo {ou) 


Xaitti 


XfJiiVQS 


Fut. 


ri90fjt.et.i 




fia-alfAtjv 




nffiv^eti 


MfAiltOS 


Lat. Aor. 


flKafiUV, 













% 65. 'EIMI and ""EIMI. 

Of other small verbs in jUt, we shall give only 
Bif.u^ to be, and sifxi, to go, both irregular. 

dfjii, to be^ (root I.) 



I Ind. I Sub. 

Imp. Pr. iifAt tis or (7 iffTi u ^^ j? 

liCfAty lo'Tov io'TOV ufAtv nrov riroy 



Imp. Pastry ris 



Fut 



ilffi(y) ufAiy ^Ti uffi 
« or>jy 



sffofjceti tffri 'iffrat 
iir-ofAihy taiSoy iirfioy. 



Opt. Imp. 

any ns fi ^<r^i ta-rea 
V/^ty ^Toy fiTYiyiffroy ivraiy 



Sff0t-f4.7jy T 

fct^oy ffhy cr^fjy 
fjcidcc ffh yro 



Inf. Pres. uyai, Fut taifffixt. Part. Pres. ay cZtrat. av, Fut. laofAiyos* 

JStfjii, I am goings (root L) 

Imp. Pr. ilftt sT? or sT i^tri D. Ifjuv Irov Iroy P. 1(/tgy 'in 1a<rt 
Sub. lo), fjjj, &c. Opt. lotfAt Imp. iV/, Itu Inf. liyai Part, lay UZffo, loy 
Imp. Past miy mis, &c. and & nias. 

Mid. ^0 hasten, Imp. Pr. is^a;, Past is^jjv. 

^ 66. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 

1. What tenses are actually used in any 
Greek verb must be learned from observation 
and from the lexicons. Tenses of the middle 
form v^ill be often found to supply the place of 



96 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

the active. The student should be required 
to ascertain carefully what tenses are in use, 
and what are not ; thus, from dxovco^ to hear, 
not axovaco and rjxovxa^ as given in the old 
lexicons, but axovctofxac and dxrjxoa^ while in 
the aorist ijxovaa is used. 

2. rtyv6ax(o^ to knoic^ (root yvo^ § 44. 1.) 
Active. Passive. 



yiyv(0(jx(a 


yiyvcjiJKOfiCiL 


iylyvaoKOV 


syiyvbjoxoi^rjv 


yvwoo^ai 


yvmo^rioo^ai 


syvtav 


eyvcoad^rjv 


lyvcoxa 


eyvcaofiai 


syvcaKHV 


iyvcaofi7]V. 


Aaii^dvco^ 


to take^ (root Xrfi 


Active. 


Passive. 


Xcifi(5dv(a 


la^^avo^oti 


iXd^^avov 


ekau^avo^TjV 


XrjipoiiaL 


Xrjcp&rjao^ocL 


ilapov 


iXTjcpd^f^v 


EiXrjcpa 


sllrjfifiat^ 


tllriffuv 


silrjfifA,7]V, 



Middle. 



ila^6fir}V 



4. Examples for practice. svQLdxco^ I find^ 
fxavOdvco^ I learn^ Ovriaxco^ I die^ l'p;^o^at, / come, 
pdXXco, I throw, ndcJ/co, I suffer, yiyvo^iai, I be- 
come. 

Rem. Many verbs, as yiyvoixai, eg/o^ai, have 
in the imperfects present and past no active 
forms. Others are altogether passive and mid- 
dle in form ; as, ataddvofiat, Se^oiiat. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 97 

§ 67. ANALYSIS AND COMBINATION 
OF VERBAL FORMS. 

1. To the pupil who has gone thoroughly 
through the elements of the Greek verb, as 
hitherto developed, it will now be found a 
very useful exercise both to analyze and com- 
bine verbal forms. The student should be 
rendered perfectly familiar with all the separate 
parts of the verb, as the nature of the aug- 
ment and reduplication, their forms and to what 
tenses they are respectively applied, the mood- 
vowels, terminations, &c. Then give him, e. g. 
iXs/ovTo to resolve into its elements ; f, the 
augment belonging to past tenses ; vro^ the 
termination of the 3 Plur. of the secondary 
tenses, Pass.; o, mood-vowel of the Ind. ; — 
thus Isy is left for the root. So XsyoLvjo, Xey 
root, OL Opt. mood-vowel, vxo 3 Plur. term, sec- 
ondary tenses passive, and of the optative which 
takes these terminations. 

2. Given for analysis. aXsyov^ Xs^aivjo Xs- 
|?^TOi/, 7te7i£i(jTai^ insiodrfoav TtSLadijaotvio^ ifra- 
gayuat^ ingd^dijv^ Ttga^atfxrfv^ xd^covTaL^ ^Xinov- 
rat, ^XsxpcovTai^ ijiXsipdaOriv, mcpiXrjvrac^ cpiX^- 
asLS^ SiCD^^adou^ ids8tcoxTO^ 8sSt6xaf.tsyy q)vyoiTqv^ 
(psvyriTat, 7ce<pevyaaL^ 7tagrfy6[.irfVy pdXyg, /3a- 
XoLVTo^ i^dXXsTO^ (3dXXria6£y stSevat, xexifjoOaiy 
^xiexo. 

8* 



98 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. The student should also be in the habit 
of forming tenses in different numbers, per- 
sons, moods, and voices, by combining the sep- 
arate elements ; thus Xeyo^ Imp. Past Ind. Pass. 
3 Sing. ; root Xey^ aug. with Past IXsy^ mood- 
vowel o, term, vxo ; i-Xiy-o-vTo. Lat. Aor. Mid. 
3 dual Af/, tense root fAf|, mood-vowel a, ter- 
mination adrjv^ i-Xe^'d-aOrfv. Opt. 3 PI. Af|-at- 
VTO. Practice will make this easy to the stu- 
dent in Greek, and will give him an unlimited 
command over the inflexions of the verb. 

§ 68. THE TENSES IN THE INDICA- 
TIVE. 

The import of the tenses has been already 
given in general in § 38, but a few additional 
remarks are needed to complete the view. 

1. The imperfect present means properly 
am doing, and, as an absolute, do. From am 
doingy comes naturally go to doings am endeav- 
ouring to do, am accustomed to do ; it is thus 
employed to state universal propositions. 

2. The imperfect past has all these modifi- 
cations of meaning except the absolute, (for 
which there is a distinct tense, the aorist,) / 
was doing, I went to doing, I endeavoured to do, 
I used to do. This latter modification of mean- 
ing is frequent. 

3. The aorist, especially the later aorist, be- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 99 

side its ordinary and proper meaning of did^ is 
employed sometimes, like the present, to ex- 
press what customarily takes place ; as, oXiyog 
%g6vos asl SiiXvaa zds (jvvrjdstag t6v (pavXcov^ a 
short time always dissolves^ &c. 

4. The perfect present sometimes passes 
over into an imperfect present, with a new but 
natural signification ; as, TcsxirifiaL^ I have ac- 
qidredy hence / possess^ riOvrfxa^ I have died, 
hence, / am dead. In this case the perfect 
past becomes an imperfect past, and the per- 
fect future an imperfect future ; thus, ixexTrj" 
[XTfVy I possessed^ xexTrjaofiat (/ shall have ac- 
quired)^ I shall possess. 

5. The following scheme presents these va- 
rious uses of the tenses. 

C I am striking^ (I endeavour to strike,) 
TVTtTco^ < I go to striking^ I strike^ I am ac- 
( customed to strike. 
( / was striking;. I went to strikins[. 

eXVTtTOV. { J 14 4 1 

' ) / used to strike, 
hvyja, I struck^ I am in the habit of striking.^ 
xvyjo, I shall strike. 
rsTvcpa, I have struck. 
xexTTifjiat, I have acquired^ hence / possess. 
BTBTvcpsiv^ I had struck. 
ixsxTrjfiTfv, I had acquired^ I possessed. 

r ( / shall have acquired, hence / 

^ ^ ^ I snail possess. 

The aorist is also often used where other languages use a perfect past. 



100 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

§ 69. THE TENSES IN THE OTHER 
MOODS. 

1. The distinction of time, which in the in- 
dicative is indicated by the tenses, is in the 
subjunctive and optative expressed chiefly by 
the moods. The subjunctive follows in its for- 
mation the primary, i. e. the present and future 
tenses, and is the conditional mood of these 
tenses, and is rendered may ; the optative in 
like manner is the conditional mood of the past 
tenses, whose analogy it follows, and is ren- 
dered migtit. Thus the perfect present is in 
the subjunctive rsTvcpo, I may have struck^ in 
the optative TSTvqjoifUy I might have struck^ i. e. 
here it is a conditional perfect past. So the 
aorist indicative or absolute past (hvxpa^ I 
struck,) becomes in the subjunctive jvyjo, I 
may strike, in the optative Tvipaifxt, I might 
strike. Even the future becomes in the opta- 
tive a future in reference to past time ; as, he 
said that I should show, eke^s ore SrfXciaoific. 

2. In the other moods also, viz. the impera- 
tive, infinitive, and participle, the aorist loses its 
signification of past time, and differs from the 
imperfect present only in not indicating con- 
tinued action. Thus rvxpovy strike, bears the 
same relation to tvuts, be or go to striking, as 
hvyja bears to hvTtiov (/ struck, I went to 
striking). 



i 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 101 

3. We present, then, the following scheme 
of the force of the tenses in the several moods. 

Indicative. 
Imperf. Pres. tvtttco^ I am striking. 
Imperf. Past. hvjtTov^ I was striking. 
Future. Tvxpco^ I shall strike. 

Aorist. l'TVT//a, / struck. 

Perf. Pres. jsTvcpa^ I have struck. 
Perf. Past. hsxvcpHv^ I had struck. 

Subjunctive (or Conditional of the Leading 

Tenses). 
Imperfect. tvtcto, I may be striking. 
Aorist. Tvyjo^ I may strike. 

Perfect. rsTvcpo^ I may have struck. 

Optative (or Conditional of Past Tenses). 
Imperfect. TVTtTotixt^ I might be striking. 
Aorist. TvyjULfit^ I might strike. 

Perfect. jsTvcpoifii^ I might have struck. 

Future. rvyjoifxi^ I might strike (hereafter). 

Imperative. 
Imperfect. TVTtxs^ be striking^ or go to striking. 
Aorist. Tvxfjov^ strike. 

Perfect. Thv(pe^ have struck. 

Infinitive. 
Imperfect. tvutblv^ to be striking. 
Aorist. rvyjatj to strike. 

Perfect. rsTvcpsvat^ to have struck. 

Future. TvipetVy to be going to strike. 



102 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Participles. 
Imperfect. TVTticov^ (being) striking. 
Aorist. Tv'i/ya?, striking (the mere act). 

Perfect. tSTvcpcogj having struck. 

Future. zvyjcov, going to strike. 

4. Let the student give the tenses, with their 
meanings, of the following verbs in the several 
moods ; Aa^/3aVo, / take^ (ptlioy I love, xsXevco^ 
I direct J (paivo^ I shoiv, cpevyco^ I fl(^^^ "^Q^X^^ ^ 
run^ Xeincoj I leave, iiavOdvco^ I learn. 

§ 70. EXERCISES ON THE TENSES 
IN THE INDICATIVE. 

1. Imperfect Present and Past. 

2ocpia fiovTf dddvarog ixivet. ^O dvrjg Ovrj- 
axsi. ' H yvvrf edvtfaxe. ^Ev & eyio ygd(pco dv 
oiSsLs. 2Jv fiiv javxd fxot dtSos^ iyco 8i dexofiat. 
Ot TtoksfjitoL fjLSv (pEvyovaiv, i^fxstg si Si6xofji£v. 
ndvxa xd dyadd dcScoaiv 6 0e6g. IIsQUTtaxoV' 
fisv iv x(o legS xov Kgovov. Bga/eia rfSovrj 
TtokXdxis fxaxgdv xcxxsl Xvitr^v. Tama sXeysv 
(used to say) b naxijg fxov. Uoxgdxijg xovg vi- 
ovs xcov ^Adrivaiov iStSaaxs. ^'Oaxig (.irj xoXdtst 
xd Ttddtj^ avxog vn^ avxcov xokd^sxat, Msytoxov 
Tcov ovxav, xoTtog ' ndvxa ydg x^9^^' xd/iaxov, 
vovs ' Sid navxog ydg xgs^^ec ' ta/vgoxaxov, dvd- 
yxTf • xgaxH ydg ndvxcov • oocpcoxaxov, ^govog ' 
dvevgiaxet ydg ndvxa. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 103 

2. Perfect Present and Past. 

Tr^v iTttcfxoXrjv aoi aTtsaraXxa. ^sSoxds [xol 
xov j(iT^va. '' H XvTtrf TtsnXjjgoxsv vfiSv jrjv 
xagdtav. ^^TtoXsXocTtaatv ^fids Seviag xal /7a- 
cficov • dXX^ ovTS dTtoSedgaxaacv ovts dTtoTtecpsv- 
yacSLv. ^Enl ttJs xokaxeias, Sg ijtl fivrj^iaxogy 
avio fxovov TO ovofia tyjs (ptXcag eTZiyeyganTaL. 
JEvgiTcidrfg iv MaxsSovia jidaTtTat. Msya xa- 
xov fioL (tvfji^i^rjxsv. OvSelg tzcotzots deov l(&- 
gaxev. Tedvrfxe OiXimtog ; Ovx^ dXX ' dadevet. 
"^O Tzaxijg xat 7) f^rJTTjg avrov ndXai izsTeXsviTJ' 
xsaav. To nvg ndvxag bfxoicos xatei • Ttifvxe 
ydg xoiovxov. ^AuoXcoXa vno xov Siyjovs. 

3. Future and Aorist. 

Tavxa noLijaco. Tavxa iTtoctfaa. Miadov ra- 
Xavxov eXa^ov xal xovxo aoi dScfco. Ol ^'EXXij- 
vsg ivix7j6av xovg Usgaag. Grfasvg xrjv ""Aged- 
SvTfv iv Nd^cp xaxsXcTte xal i^enXsvas. "Ox a xav- 
xd (the same things) (KweSaivsv (kept happen- 
ing) avxm xjf vaxegaia xal xjf xgixif^ ixdXeas 
xovg TtatSag. "Oxe sfisXXov ygd(pSLv nagsyivexo 
xtg. OvSslg xov ddvaxov ecpvyev. ""Av-qg oocpog 
xdg iv (Step avficpogdg gdov otaet xSv dXXcov. 
Ovx BTtLsg (itivo) xo udrjdrjg vScog ; "Oxi 7/ ipv/^} 
Ovjjxrj iaxLv ovdenoxs niaxevoo. UoXXd dvOgci- 
noig Ttagd yvapjv ensas (fall otit^ happen). ' H 
xov ^Ivd^ov Ttatg if xaXi] vno xrjg "Hgag etg Sd- 
fiaXiv fiexsjiXTjOtf. 



104 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

^ 71. EXERCISES ON THE TENSES IN 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 

Ilgoaegxofxai iva [irj ddvzfg. Ilgoc^rjXdov iva 
fii] ddvois. ^iSotxa /.irf ^kidtog ykvco^au ^ESe- 
SotxsLv fjtrj TjXcdtog /svoifxi^v. ^^jieoTaXxd doL 
TavTifv Tr^v intaTohjv iVa fxddtfg ti]v ifiTJv cpiXiav. 
""AnkaTSiXd ooi iTtLGzoXrjv tVa (.iddoig rrjv (ptXiav 
fiov. ^ExeXevae ^aatXevg fiij ztva jidXXeLv ngiv 
Kvgog i/^cTtXrfodeuj ^dXXov. KsXsvet ^aaiXsyg, 
[jLjj Ttva ^dXXsLv Ttglv dv Kvgog ifinXriadj} ^dX- 
Xov. ^ Aitdvai ijiovXsTO firj 6 TtaiTJg it d^doLTO 
xal 7} TtoXig [xifjLcpoiTo. ^Andvai jiovXerat [xrj 6 
Ttarijg it d^drfTat xal if noXig [xeficprfTat. ^Edv 
q)LXofiad7}g jfg^ noXvfAudrjg eazf* Et (piXofxaOi^g 
etijgj TtoXvfjLadT^g dv yivoio. 

Remark, The particles dj ore^ ijistST]^ nglv^ 
stand unchanged before the indicative and op- 
tative, but before the subjunctive they become 
hdv {rjv, av), orav, InstSdv^ ngiv dv • as, u tSoc- 
(XI, if I might see ; idv tdo, if I may see ; at 
Tavd^ ovTcog a^^h if these things are so ; idv 
Taijd^ ovTcog a/rj, if these things be so. 

§ 72. FURTHER REMARKS ON THE 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 

1. The original and proper distinction and 
use of these two moods has been given above 
and illustrated in the last section. They are 
both strictly conditional moods ; the optative of 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 105 

the past, the subjunctive of the present and fu- 
ture tenses. Their use, however, especially 
that of the optative, is much widen 

2. The signification of the optative is less 
near to the actual than that of the subjunctive. 
It is used, therefore, in cases of pure hypothe- 
sis, w^here there is no prospect or thought of a 
decision. Thus the subjunctive edv tl e^co^ 8(6- 
<?«, if I have any thing I will give it, implies a 
design in the speaker to ascertain whether he 
has any thing or not. It is a case in which he 
feels interested and wishes to arrive at a decis- 
ion, while €i exoifiL t^, doir^v av^ if I should have 
any thing I would give it, is purely hypothetical. 
It states the connexion of a given conclusion 
with a given premise, without intimating wheth- 
er there is any possibihty or expectation of the 
existence of the condition. The past tenses of 
the indicative are used where the speaker de- 
signs to express his conviction that the thing 
supposed does not and cannot exist. Thus, 

LuL EL TL9 fi cocpsXet, Tijv %dgiv dnsSiScov ai/, 
if any one icould aid me^ I icould repay the fa- 
vor^ — but I do not expect he will. 

Subj. idv Ttg fi^ cocpsX^^ ^^qlv dTtoSoac), if ^'f^y 
one aids me, I will repay the favor^ — the lan- 
guage of one solicitous to obtain aid. 

Opt. et XLS fi ^(fsh^asLS^ %dgiv dTtoSLSoiT^v dv^ 
if any one should aid me^ I should repay the 
9 



106 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

favor, — but I am entirely uncertain whether 
he will or not. 

JEl iv6[XLtov Tovg deovg dvdgcjjtcov tl (pgovxi" 
^etv^ ovx av i^dXovv avxcov, if I thought the 
Gods had any regard for men, I would not neg- 
lect them, — but I do not believe they have, 

Edv vof.d'Cco Oaovs dvdgcDTCcov tl (pgovTitstv, 
ovx afxehjaG) avzSv^ if I may suppose the Gods 
to have any regard for 7nen, I will not neglect 
them, — and I will endeavour to ascertain the 
fact. 

Et vofiL^oi/jit Osovs dvdgcDTtcov XL (pgovxi'CsLV^ 
ovx dv dfisXotrfv avxcov^ if I might suppose, let 
me but suppose the Gods to have any regard for 
men, and I would not neglect thein, — but it is a 
point involved in entire uncertainty. Here is 
a delicate shade of meaning which the English 
language can hardly express. 

3. Omitting the protasis, — the clause with 
u, — the optative with dv is used in simple 
propositions, wherever in English we say might, 
ivould^ can^ &lc. ; e. g. to dcofiaxosiSss iaxiv ov 
XLS dv dyjuLxo, the corporeal is thai which one 
can touch ; rjSicog dv fxddoLfiL rai/ra nagd aov^ 
I would gladly learn these things from thee. 
Hence from the tone of moderation peculiar to 
the Attics, it comes to be employed in making 
positive assertions ; ovx dv Xdj3oLg nagd xov /xij 
ly^oviog^ you could not^ cannot take from a man 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 107 

who does not possess; tovto ovx av yivoixo^ 
this cannot be. 

4. Exercises. 

JTsvoiTO av ndv iv zS [iaxgS XQ^^V' ^^^ ^^^ 
av TttOoLfjirfv Sais fxrj tovto TtoLslv. Ovx av Sv- 
vato [jLTf xafKov evSatfiovstv. ''jiyig igoTtidets 
TtSs oiv Tig iXsvdsgos Scafjiivoi^ davaTOv jcara- 
(pgovSv, acpYf* ^.Avav cpiXcov ovSsls av aXoiTO ^jjv^ 
e)(cov m XoLTtd dyadd ndvTa • xai ydg tols 
TtXovTovac^ xal dg%dg xat SwaaTStas xsxTijfjLi- 
voigy Soxet fxaltciTa (pikcov etvai %gsia • iv nevia 
8i^ xai xatg XotTtatg dvaTv^tatg^ fiovrfv ocovTat 
xaTa(pvyrjv etvat Tovg (piXovg. MoXtg av Tig ex 
Ttjg fXBj^ioTrfg aTZifisXaiag rag Ttjg cpvaecog dfiagTiag 
iTtixgaTTJasiev. Kal firjv av as XdjSco tcots (if I 
ever catch you) • "^1/ Xdjirfg, ^eXTidTs • 8lg di 
ovx av kd^oig. /iixaiog av TOvg ToiovTOvg Xa- 
yoifjisv fiq fiovov eig iavTovg dfiagTavsiv dXXd 
xal Trjg Tvj^rig eivai ngodoTag. 

§ 73. 

The subjunctive and optative are also used 
to express entreaty, desire, &c., but this in 
conformity with the principles stated above. 
The subjunctive chiefly in the 1 PL and the 
2 Sing, and PI. to express direct exhortation, 
entreaty, command; as, laixev, let us go; firj 
Oavfiddjfg^ do not wonder. While the optative 
is more commonly employed hke our mighty 



108 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



maij^ would J &lc. (might it be, maij it be^) for 
more general expressions of desire ; as, oXoto, 
may you perish. 

Exercises. 
MijSevl dv^KpOQoiv ovstdtorfg • xoLvjf ydg ?^ tv- 
Xr}^ xal TO fxekXov aogaxov. Kciv jxovo? yg^ 
cpavXov [,i7JT£ Xe^rf? ^i\ts egyaaxf fjii^div. KaXrjv 
(SOL Oeol StSoLSv Tv^ijv. 'SI nal ysvoLo nazgos 
svTv/saTegos. TtasLav z/avaol ifid Sdxgva TOtg 
dots jSekeOL 0ig' (come on), a rexvov, vvv xal 
10 T7fs vrjaov (what pertains to the island^ the 
condition of the island) fiddifg. Miq tovto m 
dStxTfi^ia if,i6v djfg^ at xgaxijaat avvs^ri ^iXinitco 
TTfv fid/rfv. Ev Ovrjaxotg oxav aoi to X9^^^ eXdjf. 
EvxXetdrjg 6 2JcoxgaTtx6g^ dxovaag tov dSsXcpov 
XeyovTog • dnoXotpjv at fxij aa Ti[xcogrfaaLi.trfv, iyco 
Siy acTcav, at fxrj (ptXaZv i^idg 7iaLaaip.u 

^ 74. EXERCISES ON THE IMPERA- 
TIVE, INFINITIVE, AND PARTICIPLE. 

1. Imperative. 
Tov fiav dadv (pojiov^ jovg Si yovalg itfia • 
Tovg da cpiXovg atd/vvov, xotg 8a v6/.iOLg natdov. 
Aoyioai ngo agyov. Mi] xaxocg bfitXat. Tdg 
TjSovdg drjgava xdg fxaxd So^rjg • xagxpig ydg, ovv 
Tw xaX(o fxav, dgiaxov, dvav Si xovxov, xaxtoxov. 
' Hyov fxdXiaxa aaavxcp nganatv, xoofxov, ataxv- 
vrfv^ acocpgoavvrfv. ' Aya Srj^ co Kgixov, naidco^a- 
da avx6, xal avayxdxco xtg x6 (pdgfxaxov el xixgc- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 109 

nraL • et 8i firj^ jgix^dxco b avSgcoitos. Ei rig 
he Tivos ivdstadat Soxec^ ngog ifxi Xsyiico, xal sl 
Ttg eLTtsiv T6 ^ovXsrai^ Xs^dxco. Mrj [xot dvTiXi' 
^Tfg. ^AXkd Tai>Ta ovxcog nmgdyQco. Ei vlos 
SL Tov deov, <j6aov aeavxdv^ xal xaTdjirfdL ano 
Tov (jTuvgov. El (iacftXevs 'lagarjX idTiy xara- 
^tJtco vvv and tov axavgov. Bgadscog fiiv cplXog 
yivov^ y£v6[xavog 8i neigS dcaixiveiv. Jet^ov xi iv 
xjf Ttrjga e^^Lg. 

2. Infinitive. 

XaXsnov xo noutv^ xo di xs?,sv(jat gdStov. To 
xaXcog dnodavstv tdiov xolg dyadolg. Ovxol ov- 
xcog 7)Sv laxLv xo j^g^iiaia €%£tv m dvtagov xo 
dno^dXXstv. Ov xo ;(aigetv iaxlv sv ngdxxetv, 
ovdi xo dvtdadat^ xaxcog. Xgi^ (Sgadeog fxiv (pl- 
Xov yiveadai^ ysvofxevov 8i dtaiAevsLv. Kekevo 
ae cpvXd^ai xtJv yvvacxa^ xal SiacpvXdxxsLv ecog 
dv avxog ds^ofxac. Mst^ov [xiv xaxov cpafxav xo 
dSixsLv^ eXaxxov da xo dSixalctdai. ''O ^aXXstg 
ngdxxELv fiiq ngoXaya • dnoxv/^v ydg ysXaadriaxf. 
KdSfxov (paalv ax ^oivixrig vno xov jiaaiXacjg 
dnoaxaXrivai ngog ^ifXTfOLv Evgwurfg. Sig^rig^ 
wg aitvdaxo xov ^E?,X7j(j7tovxov a^av^^dat, xal xov 
"".Adcj Stacjxdcpdac^ ngoijyav ax xSv 2Jdgdaav, 

Remark. The neuter article is used in all 
its cases with an infinitive, converting it into a 
noun ; as, xaigog xov Xayaiv^ the season of speak- 
ing ; ax lov vofiitatv^ in consequence of thinking ; 
iv TttI Tiaigdadaij in the endeavour. 



no 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



3. Participle. 

Xakenov iaii Xsystv zrpog yaaxiga^ c>xa ovx 
exovaav. \i8txai J^coxQaii^g, ovg if nohg vofii^et 
deovg^ ov vofxi^ov. "^HgaxX-^s ogytadslg Alvov 
djiexTBLvs. ' O JScoxgdirfg cpdg^axov Tttcov azri- 
davev (died of drinking). Jioysvrig Xv/vov (.isO^ 
7iuEgav {by day) clip ag, dvdgcoTtov, h'cpij^ ^ijtcj. 
'O Ttatg i^sXdcov xat (jv^vov /govov diaTgiipag^ 
^xev dycov tov [xeklovra S6(jstv to (pag/xaxov^ iv 
xvXlxl (psgovxa TSTgtfxixsvov. Zcov 6 cpavXog xal 
davdv xoXd^erat. 

RexMark 1. The participle with the article is 
used where in Latin and English the relative 
and verb are employed ; as, 6 noicov^ he who 
does (qui facit) ; 6 jgixcov^ he that runs ; 6 (Sov- 
Xofisvog^ he that chooses ; b xairij^ogcov, he that 
accuseSy the accuser ; ri anoXoyia tov ^evyovToSy 
the plea of the defendant. 

Exercises. 

Ov^ 6 s/cov TtXsLCfTa BvSaii^LOvsaTaTog iaTtv, 
dXX^ 6 aocpcoTaTog cov. 'O jtdvia Slolxcov xal 
SioLTdTTcov deog ioTt. UavTi tco ahovvTi Sodr^aa- 
TUi. 'jy dXijOsLa Tovg eiSoxag ^iya cocpsXTJoet. 
Tov fisv ev fxs TtSTtoijfxoTa^ (plXov eivac -^/ovfiat^ 
TOV 8i ngodoaovxa l/dgov. 'O /gyjotfji' etScogj 
ov/ 6 TtoXX^ eiScog aocpog. 'O (pdovcov, iavTov cog 
i/Ogov XvTTst. 'O tSv HsgaSv [iaatXevg, 6 tov 
^' Ada Siogv^ag^ 6 tov ^ EXXi^anovTOv ?fi>'|a?, 6 yijv 
xal v8(og Tovg "EXXyjvag aiTcov^ b ToXficov iv Tacg 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. Ill 

iTtttJfToXaig ygdcpuv oil SedTtoiTfs iaxlv dnavjcov 
dvOgSncov dcp^ rjXtov dvioviog fis/gt Svofxivov^ 
vvv ov TTsgl Tov xvgtos ersgcov ecvat Siayavi'Cs- 
jat^ dXV rjdrf Ttsgl rijig tov aco^axos ocoTJigia?. 

Remark 2. Many verbs, as those signifying 
to know^ to see, to show^ to appear, to remember 
and forget^ to begin and end^ take after them a 
participle instead of an infinitive ; as, ol8a av- 
TOV aocpov ovxa, I know him to be wise (scio eum 
sapientem esse). 

Exercises. 

0LXt7t7te^ [xefivrfdo dvdgono? cov. Oida dvrfios 
&v. UavaacfOs dScxovvTss. Ovs dv 6g^ (ichom- 
soever I may see) id xakd aTttTTfSevovxas, tov- 
xovs xiixriao. ^Avdgcoitos «V, fief^ivrf^o xrjv xotvrjv 
xv^yiv oat ovaav. 0avsg6g adxtv i^dLxrjfxivos vtx'' 
iuov. Ol vofjtoL (paivovxai ^XdTtxovxsg i^fidg. 
^Ogcj XTfv xv/rfv iifxtv avXXa^^dvovaav xat xov 
ndgovxa xatgov avvayovilo^evov. At iTttdvfxiac 
ovTtoxs Xriyovdiv atxt^ofisvat xdg ipv^dg xSv dv- 
dgcjTtcov sax^ dv dg^coOLv avxcov. 0aveg6g rjv 6 
KygoSy et xtg xc dyadov rj xaxov Ttotrjoetev avxovj 

Vixdv 7t£ig6fji€V0g. 

FgyXXos, 6 Ssvocpmvxog viog, iv xjj f^id^jf Ttsgl 
MavxivsLav ta^^vgm dycoviad^evog ixeXevxrioev. 
^Ev xavxif xif fid^zf xal ' EjtaficvSvSag eneaav. 
^ AnayysXdevxog di Savocpcovxt xov davdxov xov 
Ttacdog, ovx aSdxgvaa^ dXXd ydg, acprf, jjdaiv Ovrf- 
TOV yayavvrixm. 



112 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

§ 75. MIDDLE VOICE. (See ^ 54.) 

1. The middle voice has a reflexive signifi- 
cation, and denotes, 1. an action terminating in 
or upon the agent ; as, (po^sco^ I terrify^ cpo^ov- 
fiaiy I fem\ Xovco, I was/ij Xoiio^ai^ I wash my- 
selfj (pvXdiTo, I guards cpvXoLTTo^aL^ I guard 
myself^ I beware of (with an Ace.) ; 2. an ac- 
tion performed for the agent, or with reference 
to him ; as, xaxeoxgsxpaTo tov MrjSov^ he sub- 
dued to himself the Mede. 

2. It is sometimes causative; as, Xvo^ I loose^ 
I release^ Xvofiatj I cause to be released^ I rail- 
som. 

Exercises. 

^vkoLTZco TOV Xsovza. 0vXdTTOfxaL Xeovxa 
ijiKpegofxevov. 'EXovae to iiiov o^f.La xal dnsk- 
dcov iXovaaro. Xgiq naideiv zovg (piXovs xal Ttei- 
dsadai rots vofxots. 06^ei rovg xaxovs xal cpo- 
^ov Tovg dsovs. ^ETtBiS-q Oeol acji^gsg xvfidrcov 
ifie i^etXovTo^ in' igyaaiav TgiipofiaL 'Edv fxa 
OL Oeol ix xLvSvvov dTtaXXd^cocii^ dito ravn^g Trjs 
yi^g aitaXXd^o^ai. zfiakvofxevov dvOgconov^ rj 
yjvX"^ ovTS nagovcta ovre dmovaa ogdiai. ^ H 
ndvdsia^ dxivdxrfv ndXai Ttagscfxavaafzivrf acpdx- 
TEL iavTijv • ot Si svvov/ol, tdovTsg to ysyevrffii- 
vov^ aTtaadi^ievot xdxstvot TOvg dxivdxag^ dno- 
acpdTTovTai. Kvgog iveSvdaTO la onXa a 6 
ndnnog ai/T« i^smnoirfTO. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 113 

§76. EXERCISES ON VERBS IN fit. 

^ixofxat riSiog ocfa fxot dcdos. Tag fjtera^oXds 
xrjg Tv^^Tfs yavvaicos iTziaxaijo cpigsiv. OvSiv avev 
Ttovov Geos SlScoolv dvOgSTtotg. Xgovos Sixacov 
oivSga dsixwac fiovog. ^AgsTr\^ xdv ddvjf iig^ 
ovz dnoXXvTai. Osog udvxa xidriaLv oitrf daXau 
Avxovgyov, jov dsvra udaxedaLftovioig vofiovg^ 
aocpG)TaTov slvai rj/ovfiat. ^O vofiog Xsyac o 
fiTJ xaxedov firj kdfx^ave. Maya Tcaxov x6 fii] 
Svvaadai (psgetv xaxov. 0aal xovg ^ocvixag 
ovx i^ dgxrjg avgslv xd ygdfjifxaxa^ dXXd xovg xv- 
Ttovg fxovov ^laxadatvaL KaxoXoyiag dcpiaxaao, 
aTtaivai fxdXXov ndvxag dvdgoTtovg. Tovxov xov 
vofiov 6 Oaog xadaixav • at xi dyadov Oakatg^ nagd 
aaavxov Xajia. Mr) Sa^aada xijv v^aov, at dtdo' 
dtv, dkXd [irj dTtodtdtodL 

§ 77. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON 
THE VERBS. 

Jri^oadavovg aiitovxog^ ngog xov ^oxtcova^ 
aTtoxxavovai aa ^^drfvacot adv fiavcoat^ val, ainav^ 
l^f [xav^ adv fxavSat^ aa 8i^ adv (jcocpgovSai. Tdg 
fiav xSv cpavXcov ovvridaiag oXiyog j(g6vog SiiXv- 
aa^' xdg 8a xSv anovSaicov cpiXiag ov8^ dv 6 nag 
alcov a^aXaiyjatav. UgaTiai xovg So^rjg ogayofxa- 
vovg^ xcjv (jTtovSaiov dXXd firj xSv (pavXcov aivac 
[jiifirfxdg. ""PcofXTf fiaxd fxav (pgovi^aaog dxpaXtftjav, 
dvav da xavxijg nXaico xovg a/ovxag ajiXayja • 
xul xd fiav acD^axa xcov ddxovvxcov axoOfiijija xaig 



114 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Si rifs ipv^ij^ iTttfisXeiaLs insaxorrfcysv. 'H irjg 
agsTijg xrijatg nXovzov xgeixTcoVy X9V^^!^^^^9^ ^^" 
yevsiag idii. 

1 Demosthenes saying, Gen. Absolute. — ^ j^g'jtvae, dis- 
solves. So below (oq)ikr}G£v, aids, s^laips, injures, — ^ ^^^^ 
.... ogs/ofiivovg, those aspiring, or striving after glory, 

MijSsTtoTe firfSiv ata/gov notrjijas slnt^e hj- 
asLv^' xat ydg av^ tovs ciXXovs Xddxfs^ asavxS 
yf ^ avvstSijasLs. 

3Irfdsva cpikov noLov nglv dv i^ezdarfg nSs 
x8/grjTat joig ngoTsgov cptXoig. ^' EXnCCe ydg av- 
Tov xal Ttsgl oi j^evjjaeadaL tolovtov otog xat nsgi 
Bxeivovg yeyovBv. 

Zxegys [xiv id nagovxaj ^rjxst Si xd ^sXxlco. 
Nofiile fjiTfSiv SLvat x6v dvdgoTtivcov jSejiacov • 
ovxco ydg^ ovx\ svxv/6v^ e(jjf Ttegi/agi^gj ovxe t 
Svaxv/Sv, TtegiXvTtog. ,IH 

1 Hope that you will escape notice. — ^ av same as iav, if. * 
— ^ omvT(a ys, with yourself certainly^ at least. 

Tovg (piXovg svegyexovvxsg xal^ xovg i/6govg 
Svvrjaecfds xoXd^ecv. Jtoysvrfg aXsyav^ oxt Ol 
fiiv dXXoL xvveg xovg e/dgovg Sdxvovatv^ i/a Si 
xovg cpiXovg, tVa acoao. JllSovg nagd ndatv^ 
d^tog aajf idv jtgcoxov dg^jfg aavxov alSstodat. 
KgsLxxov stg x6g axag f( eig xoXaxag ifXTtsastv^' 
oi fxiv ydg vsxgovg^ ol Si ^covxag iadiovatv. 
^ Hyovfiada xov ddvaxov etvat xrjv xrjg yjvx'fjg 
dno xov aafiaxog dnaXXayTJv. IloXifiovg xal 
axdastg xal fid^ag ovSiv dXXo nagky^ai rj xo tySfia 
xal at xovxov iTtcOvfjAat ' Sid ydg xrfv xciv X9V' 



1 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 115 

fxdrcov XTrjatv ndvTes ol noXefioi rffitv yiyvovzau 
^ H iiiv yjvx^} eocxs tS dalco^ to 8a (^cofia iS Ovij- 
tS. 

^ y.al, also. — 2 '^isysv, used to say, — ^ Tjoj^a Ttoiaiv, in the 
estimation of all. — ^ efinlnTco, 

^ 78. ENGLISH INTO GREEK. 

1. Active. 

/ am writing. I was writing. I have written 
a letter. Thou hast ivritten to me a letter. I 
will write to you. I was writing when you came 
(sg/ofiat). I was coming ichen you wrote. I 
was writing ivhen you were coming. I had writ- 
ten when he came. Go to writing. Do not write. 
Let him write to me a letter. Do not keep writ- 
ing. If he should write^ I should not come (jel 
ygdipat ovx dv eXOoL^i). 

2. Passive. 

The letter is written (has been). The letter is 
(being) loritten (scribitur). The letter shall have 
been ivritten. If he comes {idv ekdjf) it shall 
not be written. If these things are written. If 
these things should be written. Let the letter be 
written. Let my words be written. Thy laic is 
written in my heart. The letter had been written 
when he came. The law was written (iygd(pdri) 
on stone. 

3. The soul of man is not seen.^ (Edipus 
slew^ his father Laius, discovered^ the enigma 



I I G INTRODUCTION TO THE 

of the Sphinx^ and married'^ his mother^ locaste. 
Learn and then teach.^ God sees the hearts of 
men and knoics^ their sentiments J Plato taught 
(used to teach) in the Academy. What shall I 
do 7 God sent^ his son into the world. Jill 
the ivicked are punished^ in Hades ^ both kings 
and servants, rich and poor. The Hellespont 
was called^^ from Helle dying in it. He that 
knows these things will do them. To do the will 
of God brings^^ happiness. 

^ OQOLO). — ~ Aor. aniyiTUVE, — ^ f^svQiaxeir, — ^ yai^iko. — 
^ didixoxoi, — ^ yiyiojoxco. — ^ diixroia. — ® ni^noi. — ^ xoAa- 
Jw. — ^^ xaAf'ai. — ^^ cpegco. 

^ 79. PREPOSITIONS. 

These govern three cases, the Genitive, Da- 
tive, and Accusative. 

Gen. ai/T6, azro, ix, ngo. 

Dat. fv, (jvv. 

Ace. etsj dvd (dvd^ in the poets, governs also 
the dative). 

Gen. and Ace. Sid^ xara, vneg. 

Gen., Dat., and x\cc. dpcpi, Ini^ /j^eid, nagd, 
Ttegt, ngos, vno. 

The fundamental idea of the genitive is that 
of going forth^ proceeding out of or from ; that 
of the dative (the case of the remote object), 
approach^ nearness. The accusative denotes the 
immediate object of the transitive verb ; hence 
the idea of motion toward, reaching forward^ 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 117 

and attaining. The meaning of the preposi- 
tions is often modified to correspond with these 
several ideas ; thus, 

With Gen. Ix, out of, dno, from; Dat. Iv, in, 
avv^ with; Ace. etgy into. 

naga^ along side of, G. from the side of D. by 
the side of A. to or toicard the side of; hence, 
G. from, D. with^ at, A. to, toward. 

Ttgog, to^ G. from to (ab), on the part of D. 
dose tOj A. to^ against. 

1. Prepositions governing the Genitive. 

^AvTLy over against, against; hence, in ex- 
change, one thing against, instead of, another^ 
instead of for (its usual meaning) ; SovXos av- 
Ti jSaatXecos • dvd^ Sv, for which things. 

"^ Atco^ from ; as, dixo zrjs noXeog^ an ixecvov 
Tov /Qovov • hence, arising from, springing 
from, by reason of; 6 and noXefxicov cpo^og, the 
fear arising from the enemy; and dixaioavvi^g, 
from, by reason of his justice. 

''Ex, out of; ax Trjg noXeog • hence, one thing 
out of another in point of time, after ; as an 
effect, in consequence of, from^ by, ix noXsfxou 
xaxd • ix TovTov, after this, or in consequence 
of this ; ix (piXov neiadalaa, persuaded by her 
friends. 

Ilgo, before; ngo Trig noXscog, ngo tov noXiuov, 
noXsfAov ngo etgrjvrfg, tear before (in preference 
10 



113 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

to) peace; before^ by way of protection and 
defence, /or, on behalf o/, [xaxsodai ngo najgc- 
Sos, 

2. Prepositiojvs governing the Dative. 
^Evy in; iv tj} nolec iv javizf riff ri^sga^ in or 
on this day ; hence, iv aoi idfiev^ we are in thee^ 
i. e. altogether dependent upon thee ; hence, as 
that on which the doing of something depends, 
through or by; Iv vofxodhatg Oeodac vof^iov, to 
enact a laic by means of JVomothetcB ; iv Aaor?, 
in, i. e. among the people. 

2!vv^ together with; riXds avv MavsXacp, he 
came with Menelaiis ; hence, 07i the side of avv 
^'EXXridiv eivac. and tvith the aid of ivix-qas avv 
^u46j^va^ he conquered in connexion with^ i. e. 
with the aid of Minerva. 

3. Prepositions governing the Accusative. 

Eh, into ; eta^XOov els rrjv noXtv • to ; as, 
ixsTo elg Kgiovxa^ he came to Creon. I do 
this into a thing, i. e. for a thing, with respect to 
a thing; hence variously rendered, according 
to the connexion, ybr, on account of with respect 
to. toward^ against^ before ; as, inatvuv nva eis 
T4, to praise any one for any thing ; eig ziva si- 
TtSLv, to speak to^ or before any one ; els to legov 
riai^ovv, they committed impiety in respect to, or 
toward the temple. 

^Ava, up^ along up ; dvd xov TZOTUfxdv nXesiv, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 119 

to sail up the river. This meaning is rare ; gen- 
erally, throughout^ along over; dvdjrjv '^ctar, 
alo?ig over, throughout Asia ; avd axgajov^ 
throughout the army ; dvd Ttavra rd srrf. alongj 
during all years ; dvd xgdroSj up to one^s power. 

'^i/a, with the poets, governs the Dative, and 
signifies upon ; xgvaB(D avd axrJTtrgco. 

4. Prepositions governing the Genitive 
AND Accusative. 

z/ta, through. Gen. to e}^x^^ ^Xde did tov 66- 
gaxog * hence (as that which we go through is 
the means of arriving at a given object), by 
means of ; thus, Sid 7to?Jf.iov yiyvsTai 6}.LipLgj 
through, by means of war comes affliction ; 8ls- 
XeysTo avTocg dt^ igfiTjvecos, he conversed with 
them through an interpreter. 

Ace. through (poetic) ; 8id Safxaia, through 
the mansion. On account of; Std ravTa^ on ac- 
count of these things, viz. either retrospectively, 
in consequence of these things, or prospectively, 
for the sake of these things. 

Kard^ down. Gen. down from; xazd rSv 
TtszgSv gLTtretv rcvd^ to cast any one dozen from 
the rocks; hence, under; xazd t6v xvixdrov^ 
dozen in respect to, i. e. under the loaves ; xard 
axoTtov^ down in relation to a mark, — at or against 
a mark; thus against, its ordinary meaning with 
Attic writers, chiefly of language, thoughts, 
&c. ; etTtelv xaid jtvog^ to speak against any one. 



120 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Sometimes more general, in relalion to ; thus, 
oi enatvoL xaxd rijs noXecos^ the praises lavished 
on the state. 

Ace. as relates to, according to, the general 
relations to be modified by the connexion ; 
xad^ '^'Of,i7fgov^ according to Homer ; xaxd j^ijv 
xal xaxd ddXaaaav^ in respect to, i. e. by land 
and sea ; at xax^ ^Aoiav ovxes^ those who are 
in Asia ; fut^cov iaxlv 7) xaxd dvdgcoTtov^ he is 
greater than according to man, — greater than 
human ; xaxd noXas, according to cities, — city 
by city ; Siacpigei xaxd xo fieyedos^ he surpasses 
(as to, as it respects) in stature. 

'Tneg^ over, above. Gen. above with verbs of 
rest; to ilScog vneg xSv {.lacjxav ecpaivsxo, the 
water appeared above their breasts ; £| AldioTti- 
as xijg vTtig AlyvTZxov^ from Ethiopia ichich is 
beyond Egypt ; hence, over by way of defence 
and protection, on behalf of, for; vnig xSv 'El- 
Xrjvov fidxsadai^ to fight for the Greeks ; hence, 
m relation to ; st xd nagd aol xaXSs s/st^ dag- 
gsL vitig ixsLvcjv, if thy affairs are prosperous, 
be of good courage in relation to them. 

Ace. over, with verbs of motion ; ^dXXetv 
vnig X7JV otxiav, to cast it over the house ; above, 
beyond, with verbs of rest ; vusg Xoyov^ above 
description ; K?Jag%os iTtoXefxec xotg &Q^^^ '^ols 
vnig 'EXXijcjTtovxov otxovaL 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 121 

5. Prepositions governing the Genitive, 
Dative, and Accusative. 

^A^(pi^ about Gen. and Dat. ahout^ concern- 
ingj on account of; d^cpl jijg noXecog • d^cpl t^ 
CTo^aTL • diicp^ ^EXevtf fid/aodat^ to fight on ac- 
count of Helen ; jotjjS^ a[i(pl yvvatxl noXvv 
j^govov dXyscL ndax^tv. 

Ace. about, in the vicinity of ; dfKpl rd ogrf 
iyevsTo^ he was about, i. e. in the neighbourhood 
of the mountains; d[xq)L tl e/sLv^ to be occupied 
about any thing. 

""Etcl^ upon. Gen. eTtl itoXsog ^cofxSv, upon the 
altars of the city ; hence, at, by ; inl rrjs daXda- 
(jtjg, upon, at the sea; I9)' rifxcov, upon us, i. e. in 
our time. 

Dat. close upon, by ; int tS Trora^w, close by, 
by the river ; hence, dependent upoii ; ovx edrat 
iiti T« ddeXcpS, he ivill not be dependent on his 
brother ; inl dogotg^ dependent upon gifts, on 
condition of gifts ; int Tovzocg, on these condi- 
tions. 

Ace. upon, with verbs of motion ; drsnidrjasv 

inl Tov innov, he leaped upon the horse; to, 

against ; rjXavvsv inl to nddog, he rode to the 

fatal spot ; Uvat inl jovg noXB(iiovg, to go against 

the enemy. 

MsTa {fiiaog, middle,) implies connexion, 
community, being in the midst of a thing ; hence, 
Gen. with, among, in connexion with; (lajd 
10* 



12:2 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

vexQov xecadai^ to lie among the dead; fisja (^vfi- 
^id)^ov i^id/saOat. 

Dat. (Poet.) among ; iisjd argajS^ f,tsTd j^eg- 
aiv^ in the midst ofy i. e. in his hands. 

Ace. In Homer, among, with verbs of motion 
and also of rest ; 1/3?^ ngos ovgavov fiezd Saifio- 
va? dXXovg. With Attic writers, next, next af- 
ter, after ; ^dgSeis^ noXts nXovaicoxdxri f^isTd Ba- 
fivXava^ Sardis, the inchest city next to Babylon; 
fiezd Tavra^ after these things. 

Ilagd^ by the side of. Gen. from the side of 
from (with reference to source, dno with refer- 
ence to distance) ; dyyeXo<g nagd ^aaiXicog^ a 
messenger from the king ; ixaOecv nagd jLvog^ to 
learn from any one ; hence ^ by ; nagd rav OeSv^ 
from or by the Gods. 

Dat. icith (apud), by one^s side, among; nagd 
(jol xaisXvov, they lodged icith thee, — • (chez 
vous) at thy house ; nag' ij^ilv zavja ovicog iazc, 
icith us (where we live) these things are thus ; 
dgsTi] TLfidrai^ nagd deotg xai nag" dvdganotg* 
hence, in estimation of; nag" ifxat, with me, i. e. 
in my estimation. 

Ace. to, towards (to the side of), along (along 
side of), nagd rrjv noXtv, to the city ; nagd tov 
noTafiov^ along the river ; near (by the side of), 
Tcgjjvtf nagd rrjv oSov, a fountain near the road; 
denotes comparison (one thing along side of 
another), in comparison icith ; zavrd iait nag" 
oifSiv, these things are in comparison icith noth- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 123 

ing (amount to nothing) ; jtagd rd aAAa ^©a, 
SoTtsg deot^ avOgcoTtot (itorsvovaL, in comparision 
with other animals men live as Gods (beyond 
other animals) ; hence, beyond, in violation of, 
contrary to ; ndgd tovs vofjtovg^ nagd zi^v cpvoiv^ 
Ttagd rds dTtovSdg. 

Ilsgi, around, about. Gen. (about), concern- 
ing, respecting ; jtsgl tovtov^ concerning these 
things; ixaxsadai negl Ttargtdos, to fight concern- 
ing, for one^s country. In Homer, often above ; 
Ttegi dXXov, above others. 

Dat. close about ; negl t« c^r^dsi dagaxa ft- 
Xsv, he had a coat of mail about his breast ; ^6vrf 
Tiegl tS aSfiaji. 

Ace. about, in a looser and more general 
sense ; OLxovviat nsgl noza^ov, they dwell about 
the river ; negl Tovxovg revs )(g6vov?, about these 
times ; dfxagrdvsLv Tcsgc jtva, to offend about, in 
relation to any one ; acocpgovsiv negl tovs dsovg. 

ITgog {itgo), to (in, or into the sight of). 

Gen. (from the presence of) from, by, on the 
part of (a very general relation) ; ngos ivos dg- 
XeoOat xaXkcaxov • iXsvdegog eazi ngos jtargos 
xal ngog fxijzgog, he is free on the part of, as 
respects his father and his mother ; o,zl dtxaio- 
zazov Tcal ngog decov xal ngos dvdganov, what- 
ever is most just, on the part of in the estimation 
of Gods and men. 

Dat. close to, near or by; ngos zS nozafxS* 



124 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

(dose upon) in addition to ; ngos tovxols, in ad- 
dition to these things. 

Ace. /o, with verbs of motion ; TtefjLTtsL ngog 
Tov oivSga • toward ; ngos rrjv rjS, toward the 
east; towards a thing is with reference to a thing, 
with relation to, on account of, a thing ; ngog 
Tuvza, toward, loith reference to^ on account of 
these things ; xaAog ngos Sgofiov, excellent in re- 
spect to, or for running; henee used in com- 
parisons ; Ttgos dsov TttOrjxog (pavsLxat, in respect 
to God, i. e. in comparison with God, he will ap- 
pear an ape ; ngos ttJv d^cav iycdaxco iStdoaav, 
they gave to each one with respect to, according 
to, his desert ; against ; fxrj Xaxzite ngos xivrga^ 
do not kick against the pricks. 

""Tno, under. Gen. vno /dovos, under the earth 
(with verbs of rest) ; often by, to denote the 
agent with passive verbs ; inaivovvTai vno tSv 
noXlSv, they are praised by the multitude. 

Dat. close under ; vno tj} noXsi, close under, 
near to the city ; hence, subject to ; vno (SaatXac 
£Lvat, to be subject to a king. 

Ace. under, with verbs of motion ; vno jovs 
noSas TOV innov xvcov vnedga/^is • aLOxt(Jios dvj^g 
vno "Iltov r(X6e • vno tovs avzovs ^govovs, 
about the same time. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 125 

^ 80. GENERAL SUMMARY. 

We give the following condensed view of 
the ordinary significations of the prepositions. 
The student will be careful, however, always 
to endeavour to trace remoter senses back to 
the primary, as is partially done in the preced- 
ing section. 

Prep, with Gen. 

dvTLj over against, — instead of, for. 

dno^ from, — springing from (source), after, 
by reason of, by. 

ix^ out of, — from (source), after, in conse- 
quence of, by means of by. 

TCQo, before, — on behalf of, for. 

Prep, with Dat. 

iv, in, — among, on, by. 

dvv, together with, — with the aid of. 

Prep. W'ith Ace. 

sts, into, — to, toward, against, — with respect 
to, for. 

dvd^ along up, — up to, throughout, during, 
Dat. (Poet.) upon. 

Prep, with Gen. and Ace. 

Sid, Gen. through, by means of; Ace. {through. 
Poet.), on account of 

xard, Gen. down from, under, against, in re- 
lation to ; Ace. in relation to, according to, at. 



126 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

vneg, Gen. over, above, heijond, on behalf of, 
in relation to ; Ace. over, beyond. 

Prep, with Gen., Dat., and Ace. 

diKpL^ Gen. and Dat. about, concerning, on ac- 
count of; Acc. about, in the vicinity of 

aui. Gen. upon, at or by, toward, in the time 
of ; Dat. close upon, by, dependent on, in addi- 
tion to ; Acc. upon, to, against. 

fisid. Gen. among, together ivith; Dat. (poet.) 
among ; Acc. next, after. 

Ttagd, Gen. from, by (chiefly with persons) ; 
Dat. with, in presence of, in the estimation of; 
Acc. to, toward, near, along, in comparison with, 
beyond, contrary to. 

Ttgos, Gen. on the side of, toward, from, on the 
part of, by ; Dat. clbse upon, before, in addition 
to ; Acc. to, toward, against, for or with refer- 
ence to. 

TtegL, Gen. around, about, concerning; Dat. 
close about; Acc. about (more loosely). 

V7t6, Gen. under, by ; Dat. close under, subject 
to; Acc. under (with motion). 

§ 81. REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 

1. After verbs of motion toward, the prepo- 
sition generally (though not always) governs the 
accusative ; with those of rest, a genitive or 
dative ; as, nagd (iaatXea, to the presence of the 
king ; nagd (iaaiXet, with or in the presence of 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 127 

the king ; ?) acpalga mitTH inl ttJv Tgdns^av, the 
ball falls upon the table ; if acpalga xetjat inl 
Tijs TgaTts^Tfs^ the ball lies upon the table; r] 
ccpatga TcstTat inl ij} Tgani^jf, the ball lies close 
upon (by) the table; y acpalga xvXivSsTat vno 
Tgdns^av^ the ball is rolling under the table ; ?/ 
ccpalga xetrat vno Tgans^rfg^ the ball lies under 
the table ; if acpalga xeczat vno rgans^jf. the ball 
lies close under, at the foot of the table ; ^ 
cKpatga xgsfxdvvvTac vnsg Tgane^r(?y the ball is 
suspended over the table; ^ acpatga glmszai 
vnig jgdne^av^ the ball is thrown over the table. 

2. Meid with the genitive, and avv with the 
dative both indicate connexion with, but ixeid 
(from fieaosj middle,) more intimate union, a 
mutual contact; ^s, fjterd vsxgSv xsiaofiat, I shall 
lie together with, among, in the midst of the 
dead. 

3. 'Jko, by, is most frequently used to de- 
note the agent with passive verbs ; vno rov Stf- 
(lov CTscpavovTai, he is crowned by the people ; 
often, however, nagd and ngog with the geni- 
tive, and sometimes even etc and dno. They 
are sometimes used in the same way with in- 
transitive verbs, particularly dvjjaxsiv, to die, 
and nda^sLv, to suffer ; as, vno ^'I^xiogos dnida- 
vB, he died by Hector. 

4. Kard^ against, is used chiefly with refer- 
ence to speaking, thinking, acting. Motion 



128 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

against is expressed by jtgos and ijti' Xsystv 
xard TLvog, to speak against any one ; Uvai ini 
Ttva, to go against any one. 

§ 82. EXAMPLES. 
1. oixia^ house. 

avxi Tijg olxia?, instead of or for the house. 

and rijg otxtas^ from the house. 

ix Ty? otxtag, out of the house. 

ngo rrjs olxLas, before the house. 

iv Tjf otxta^ in the house. 

dvv Tx} oixia^ together with the house. 

ets T7^v oixtav^ into the house. 

dvd TTiv otxiav^ throughout the house. 

did Tijs olxiagy through the house. 

did T7^V oixtav, on account of the house. 

xard zrjs oixtag^ down from the house. 

xaid Ti]v oLxcaVy at or in the house. 

vTteg rijg otxtag^ (to be) over the house^ in re- 
lation to or for the house. 

VTteg Tijv oixiav^ (to go) over or beyond the 
house. 

d^cpl Trig o^'^^^^j about or concerning the house. 

d^cpl TTf oLxta, about the house. 

dacpl Trfv otxiav^ about the house. 

inl Tijg otxtag^ (to be) upon the house. 

inl Tjf oixiay close upon^ near to the house. 

Ini T?^V oixcav^ (to go) upon, to^ against the 
house. 

fxeid Trjg otxiag^ together ivith the house. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 129 

[isid xaig OLxtaigj (poet.) among the houses. 

fxeToi T?^V oLxcavy next to the house. 

Ttagd T^g oixiag^ from^ by the house. 

Ttagd irfv olxiav^ to^ toward^ near^ beyond the 
house. 

Ttsgl Trjg olxiag^ concerning the house. 

Ttsgi rrj olxia^ close about the house. 

negt ri^v olxiav, about^ in the vicinity of the 
house. 

ngog zrjs otxiag, on the part of, in relation to 
the house. 

ngog tj} otxia^ close vpon^ near the house. 

ngog t7]V otxiav^ to, against, with reference to 
the house. 

vno Trig ^^^^^^5 under the house ; vn avdgc}' 
nov, by a man. 

vno TTf otxia, close under^ at the foot of the 
house. 

vno zrjv otxtav, (to go) under the house. 

2. Iloksfxog, tear. 

ex noXsfiov^ (out of) after or in consequence 
of tear. 

8cd noXs^ov, through war^ by means of war. 
iv noXi^ico, in war. 
dg noksfiov^ into or for war. 
did noXsfxov, on account of war. 
nagd noXsfxov, during war. 
avd nokeiiov, during war. 
11 



130 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

xazd noXsi-iov^ in relation to war^ in war or 
by irar. 

vTtsQ TtoXsfiov^ in behalf of in relation to war. 

du(pi or nsgl noXs^ov (f n/at), to be occupied 
abouf^ engaged in tear. 

nsgl 7toXsf,iovy concerning war. 

ngog noXsfiov, to or for war. 

fisToi noXs^ov^ in connexion with war. 

fisid TioXsfiov, after the war. 

3. Sentences. 

UoXXd jxoi eSoxsv elg azgaxov^ he gave me 
many things for an army (to enable me to raise 
an army). 

Ilgos Tovs Ggaxas iTtoXefxi^aa, I fought against 
the Thracians. 

^Tnsg Tijs 'JSXXdSog izLfxcjgovfxrfv ^e& v/xcov, 
on behalf of Greece, I punished them^ in con- 
nexion with you. 

^ Slcpilovv Kvgov dvd^ &v sv snadov vu^ ixst-' 
vov^ I assisted Cyrus in return for the favors 
which I received from him. 

^Aveuvhvaa ix aov, I recovered breath by 
means of thee. 

JTgog ixBLvotg tl cpijs ; what dost thou say in 
addition to those things ? 

'TTtconTSvov inl jiaaiXia tevat, fiKjdcjdrjvaL 8a 
ovx ini TovTco acpaaav, they suspected they were 
going against the king^ and they said they were 
not hired for this (upon condition of this). 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 131 

^td v^gtv avTOv ragaTiofxeda ix tov [xriSsv 
tpgovii^atv a>v Bygr(V^ we are disturbed on account 
of his insolence, in consequence of not paying the 
necessary attention to our affairs. 

^^vd^ G>v vfisis vTtig vucov avrcov Tt^cogrjaadde^ 
in return for which things do you on behalf of 
yourselves inflict punishment. 

§ 83. EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS. 

1. ^EXbl^bto avTzj Toi ddxgva Tcard^ tcov Tta- 
geiSv. n6Xe^io<s y\v Kvgxo ngo<; UeLoiSa? xal 
Mvaovg. Kazd ids dvgas tov dgfiareLOv Sicpgov 
avsjSaivsv'^ inl to dgua, Hsigo) ofioios nsgl 
ixetvov eTvai, oto? nsg xal ixsivog nsgi as. Tot- 
ovTos yivov Ttsgl jovg yovstg olovg dv sv^aio^ 
Ttegt asavTov yLvsaOai rovg asavTov Ttatdag. 
ZtfiBL zrji^ ix TOV TtoXsfiov {jcjirfgiav fisTd xai^rfs 
So^rjg, dXXd ai] fisz^ ataygag (prjfxtfg. ^O aog TCa- 
T7jg iv TjjSe Tjj [icd ^f^ega £| dcpgovog ococpgov 
ysyevi^Tau 

^ y.aza^ down. — ^ drsjSaLv^v, he was mountings — 3 g'^oy^ 
av Ev^aio, as you would pray^ loisk. 

2. Ilag^ ifiol Seijcfst as axrfvovv avv Toig aotg 
rs xal sfioig (piXotg. — 'Tjzsg Trjg xa^rig ^V^ocpos 
7jv, 'O ovv KXsag^og ovx avs^t^a^v inl tov 
Xocpovy dXX^ V7t^ avTov aTijaag to aTgdisvfia 
nsfinsL Avxiov tov Xvgaxovatov xal dXXov snl 
TOV Xocpov xal xsXsvsi, xaztdovTag ra vnig tov 
Xocpov, TL soTLv duayyslXai. Kal o Avxiog 



132 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

rjkatys^ xal tScov dnayysXXeij oxl cpsvyovaiv dvd 
xgdios. — ^ AnodvijaxsLv Set ngo tov dSixecv. 2Jov 
d(pc)vov xuT ixetvovg jovg ^qovovs iv zats ex- 
xXTjalais xaOiff^iivov iycj nageXOcov eXsyov. ^Ev 

TO OacO TO TOVTOV TSXOS ^V, OVX iv ijXOL. 

3. Xenophoifs Jlnabasis, I. 2. 

^td fieaov tov TtagaSetaov get 6 MaiavSgog 
TtOTUfios ' al Si Ttriyal avrov eldtv ex tcov ^adi- 
Xeiov • gel 8e xal Sid Trjg KeXaivcov noXecog. 
"jEoTi 8e xal [leydXov ^aatXecog ^aoiXeia iv Ke- 
Xaivaig igvfxvd^ inl Taig nrfyatg tov Mag6vov 
TiOTafAOVy vTto Tjf dxgoTtoXet • get Si xal ovtos 
Std Trjg TtoXeog^ xal ifxjSdXXet eig tov MalavSgov. 
'^i/ravSa XeyeTac ^ArcoXXcov ixSetgai Magavav^ 
vixrjaag (cci5toV) igi^ovzd ol negl oocpiag. xal to 
Segfia xgefzdoat iv t6 dvjgcp^ oOev at nriyai' 
Sid Si TovTO b noTa^iog xaXetTat Magavag. 

4. Xen. Mem. I. 3, 4. 

Et Si Tt So^etev ^coxgdzet orff^iaiveodat nagd 
Tav deavy ^ttov dv inetoOrf^ nagd^ toc arffzatvo- 
(leva Ttotrjcjat^ ij et Ttg avxov enetdev^ oSov Xa- 
^etv ijye^ova TvcpXov xal (xij etSoxa ttjv oSov 
dvxl [iXenovTog xal etSoTog' xal zSv dXXcov Si 
fiogiav xaTTf/oget^^ oiitveg nagd id vno tcoi/ decov 
atffiatvoueva notoval t^, (pvXaTTOfAevot Tiqv nagd 
Totg dvQgconotg dSo^tav. Avzog Si ndvza Tdv- 
Oganiva vnegeaga ngog^ ttjv nagd tcov deSv 
^vf.i(iovXiav. 

^ He would have been less persuaded. — ^ nuQUj contrary/ 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 133 

to. — 3 Endeavoured to persuade him. — ^ y.ai rwv SXXwv ds 
fifaqiav TiaTtiyoqu, and he accused others too of folly, — 
^ TiQogy in comparison with. 

^ 84. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSI- 
TION. 

1. Prepositions compounded with verbs gen- 
erally add their own import to that of the sim- 
ple verb ; they also have in composition the 
same variety of meanings as when standing 
alone ; thus, Xaa^avsiv^ to take, fieraXafx^dvetv^ 
to take in connexion with, to participate ; ^aiveiv^ 
to go, Sta^aivsiv, to go through, ix^3atvecv, to go 
out^ ano^aivHv, to go away^ dva^aiveiv^ to go 
up, Tcaraldaivaiv, to go down; xaraXs/eiv^ to 
speak against. 

2. Exercises on Prepositions in Com- 
position. 

IIags(jT7)X£ Totg jSafxatg xd dvfxara. ^JEx rov- 
Tov els Tov? icpjjliovs i^ifj^^ovTUt. ^ O Kvgos awe- 
xdXsas Tovg OTgarrf/ovs. Kvgos. enu uariXaaev 
stg Trjv TtoXiv, fxaTeneiiTtsTO 2!vsvveatv ngos iav- 
TOV. JScoxgdjTig neguXdcov, ijietSri ol jSagvveodat 
s(prf Toc GxsXri, xarsyJudrf vTntog. Ov fievovaa r^ 
ipy/i} iv T(5 aSfian ovvanoOvrjcfxeL ^jEfxoi Sog 
Tai^ra oitag iyco SiadS zotg ijXixuoTaLg. — "^'Oxe 
{jiiv siCfTJldofjiev elg xrjv axrjv^v avxrjg, x6 ngcoxov 
ov StsyvcofjLBv avxrjv, 6g di dvaaxrjvai avxrjv ixs- 
Xev(jafX8v.^ awavsoxTfaav fiev avxi} ndaai at d^icpl 
avx7Jv ' dtrjveyxs di ivxavda, ngoxov ^uiv, xS fxa- 
11* 



134 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

2^s6ei^ ensiTU 5f, xal jjj dgszjj. 'J2g ovv tovxo 
ijxovasv i) yvvi}', TtegLxaieQQjj^aro is ror avcodsv 
TtenXov^ xal dvcoSvgajo ' avvavs^oijaav Si avxjj 
xal at Sficoai. — ''^ fisv eTttaiaaai^ StacpvXaTTe 
Tats ^LsXixais • a 8s uiq /ASfiddrixas^ 7tgoa?.dfx[iavs 
ratg eitioxij^ais. Uoxa/xov Sia^aivsiv. Kal 
^aaiksvg dxovaag nagd Tioaacpegvovg xov Kv- 
gov oxoXpv^ dvxLTtagsaxsvd^exo. 

§ 85. EXERCISES ON THE PTlEPO- 
SITIONS. 

English into Greek. 

^11 good things^ come from God. The mes- 
senger was seiit^ by the king. From, loar are 
many evils. With thee is a fountain of life. 
The river of life is from the throne of God, and 
near it is the tree of life, ^fter tear is peace, 
after day night, after life death. He departed^ 
from the city, and went through the plain to the 
river. I sit {xddrifxai) by the side of the old 
man} The sun moves^ above^ the earth. Jill 
injustice is control^ to the lato of God. Thy law 
is in my heart. Peace shall be ivith you. The 
brave man'^ fights J or his country, but the cow- 
ard prefers his own safety to^ (before) that of 
his country. I lead^ the army along the river. 

^ Ttiivxa xa ayadu. — ^ aTTOOTtllM. t- ^ (Ittsq/o^ixi. — "* Old 
man, ytoo)v. — ^ Moves, noQfvnai. — ^ Above, vjisq with 
Gen. — ''Brave man, updiJtlog. — ^ The coward prefers 
. . . . to, dtdog oclf^tlrtxi .... n^o. — ^ I lead, m/w. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 135 

An eye for an eye^ and a tooth^ for a tooth. 
Virtue instead of beauty,^ and happiness instead 
of pleasure. On account of fear I am not able 
to speak. Move us is the heaven^ and beneath 
us is the earth. I descended from the mountain 
and brought a tree with me. What ye hear in 
the darkness^ speak in the light. A certain one, 
selling^ a house, carried around a stone from it 
for a sample.^ Those who dwelP about the river 
know nothing concerning these things. On ac- 
count of the death of the Cyclops,^ Apollo was 
sent down^ from heaven into the earth, and 
served^ in Thessaly with Admetus. 

^ A toothy odovg. — ^ Beauty^ naXXog. — ^ Selling^ 'ji(x)Xwv. 
— ^ dg delyfja. — ^ oi oiy.ovvTeg. — ^ iwr Kyxkconiav. — ^ JVas 
senl doion^ xontTiBfAifd^T]* — ® Served, i&i^iEvasv. 

^ 86. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

1. Fables. 

Avxog tScov Ttotpsvag iadtovrag iv axrfvif Ttgo- 
/Saiov, iyyvg ngooeXdc^v^ rjkr/cog,^ 1'^?^, dv r^v do- 
gv^og, Si i/co tovto iTiocovv ! 

^saiva, 6vstdttof,tsvrf vno dXSnsxog, ini lo^ 
bid navTog^ sva tlxtblv^ sva^ ecprf, dXXd Xiovxa. 

^ fikUog — ^oQVpog, what a tumult there would he. — 
2 inl TO — jUtiiv, for her bringing forth, — ^ ^qoi'ov un- 
derstood, in all her lifetime. 



136 INTRODUCTION TO THE 



2. Anecdotes. 



\jQiaTi7t7Tog igoTrfdslg^ xiva laxlv^ a Set lovg 
TtacSag i^iavOdvetv^ scpi^^ ots^ avSgas yevofisvoi 
XQijOovrat. ^AvTLodevijg igoTi^delg^ tl tcjv fxadtf- 
fidicDV dvayxaioTajov^ f^D?^, lo xaxd aTto^adetv. 
Zijvcov ngos t6^ (pXvagovv [xstgdxLov^ 8td tovtOj 
eiTts^ 8vo (oia k)(Ofiev^ aiofxa 8i fV, iVa Ttkeio 
fxiv dxovcoi^isv^ rjiiova Si Xeyco^uv. '^giaioTiXrig 
6vaL8Ll6[,iEv6g 7TOT8 OTL Ttovi^gco dvdgcoitco iXs7^fio- 
avvijv €8cox8v^ ov jov rgoTtov^ I'^t^, aAAoc top dv- 
dgoTtov ijXeijaa. IlXdjcov 6g/tt6[,isv6s noxs xS 
OLxexzf^ ijtLOxdvxos^ Sevoxgdxovg^ Aa/3«i// f^?^, 
xovxov^ fiaaxiycoaov ' iyco ydg 6gyi^of.iaL. 

^ olc . . . . ;^9?J(/orrai, what they will use, — 2 'ji^^qq io, to 
the talkative^ S^c. — ^ ijiioTavToc, standing by. — ^ Xa^Sdiv 
Toviov, taking this person, or take this person and. 

3. Plato's Gorgias, ch. 79. 

^SloTteg "Oi^Lijgog Xiyei, 8uvsi[xavxo x-qv dg^rjv 
6 Zevg xal 6 ITo6et8cov xal 6 IIXovxtDv^ e7tSL8rf 
nagd xov naxgog nagsXajSov • jjv ovv vc/xog o8s 
Ttsgl dvdgcoTtcov enl Kgovov^^ xal del xal vvv sxc 
eaxLv Iv deotg^ xihv dvdgconcov xov fxev 8txat(og 
xov jiiov 8ieXd6vxa xal oaicog^ enetSdv xskevxTJatf, 
is [xaxdgcov vrjoovg dmovxa olxstv iv ndarf sv- 
8aifjiovia ixxog xax6v, xov 8s d8ixcog xal ddecog 
£ig x6 xijg xioscog xe xal 8ixrfg 8e(jfX(oxygLov^ o 87^ 
xdgxagov xaXovaiv, tevat. 

^ inl KqovoVj in the time of Saturn, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 137 

4. From Isocrates. 

Zsvg ^ HgaxXsa xal TdvjaXov j^swrjoas (a)g 
ot [xvOot Xsyovdi xal TcdvTS? Tttaievovat) tov [liv, 
did Trjv dgsTj^v^ dddvaiov iTZoirjae • tov Si, Sea 
TTfv TcaxLUVy rats fis/LOiatg TCfioQiatg ixoXaaev. 
Ols XQi] Ttagadei/fxaac ^^gofxivovg ogsysaOat rrjs 
xaXoxa/adcas • xal firj fiovov Totg vcp^ ^fiov 
€igrjfiSvoig ififxavstv^ dXXd xal rcov tzoli^tSv rd 
^eXftdTa [xavddvsLVj xal tcjv dXkcov aocpLOi^v^ 
at TL ^gr\ciiuov dg-qxaaiv^ dvayiyvcodxeiv. "^'SloTteg 
ydg TTJv fisXijTav ogofisv i(p^ dnavxa [xiv rd 
l3Xa(jT7JfiaTa xaOt^dvovaav^ dcp^ ixdaiov 8i rd 
Xgyjati^ia Xafijidvovaav • ovtcj ^grj xal tovs nai- 
Seias ogsyoiisvovg firiSsvog fiiv dTtsigos ax^iv^ 
navjayodev Si rd XQV^^f^^ (jvXXsysiv. MoXtg 
ydg dv rig ex Tavirjg rrjg iTtifisXetag idg Trjg cpv- 
ascog dfiagjiag ijiLxgaTTJastsv. 

5. Xenophon. Cyr. I. II. 6. 

Ot TcaWsg tcjv Usgacov^ ot stg rd SiSacfxaXsta 
(poLTavTsg^ Sidyovai fiavOdvovTsg dtxaioavvrfv • 
xal XeyovtjL^ otl inl tovto eg/ovTat^ Sansg nag^ 
T^fXLv ot zd ygdfxfxaTa f^iaOi^ao/xsvot. Ot Si dg- 
yovTsg avzSv StaTeXovac to nXstOTOv Trjg rn^dgag 
Sixd'CovTsg avTotg, riyvsTai ydg Srj xal natal 
Ttgog dXXjjXovg, Saitsg dvSgdotv, iyxXri^iaTa xal 
xXoTtrjg xal dgTtayrjg, xal (Stag xal dndTrfg xal 
xaxoXoyiag xal dXXcov, oiov Srj elxog. Ovg S^ 
dv yvcocji TOVTcov tl dStxovvTag, TificogovvTai. 



138 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

KaXd'Covat Si xai ovg oiv ddtxcog i/xaXovviag 
avgiaxcoai, 

6. Id. 

^ixaCovoL Si xal ij^xXy/xajos, ov evexa dv- 
dgaitoi i^aaovoL fxiv d}.hj/.ovs ^idXioja^ Stxd^ov- 
Tat Si {jxiara^ d^aQiOTias ' xal ov dv yvacd 
Svvdusvov fxiv ;(dQiv djtoSiSovai^ fxif duoSiSovxa 
Sfj xoXd^ovoi xal tovtov ta^vgcog. Olovzai yd§ 
Tovs dyagiaTOvs xal negl dsovg dv (.idXtoia 
df^ieXcos f^f^v, xal negl yoviag xal najgiSa xal 
cpiXovs. zftSdaxovai Si zovs nalSag xal aaxpgo- 
cvvi^v. 

7. 

To fiiv xgvctLOv iv tS nvgl (iactavL^ofisv, tovs 
di (piXovg iv ralg drvyiacs SLayt^voaxofxsv. — 

Isocrates. 

/did TovTO OLfxac ijfxdg jtaiSag oviag ids tSv 
Tton^Tcov yvco aag ix^avddvsiv^ iv' dvSgss ovtss 
avxaZg ygoueOa. — ^schines. 

To ifiov ocofxa^ a TtatSsg^ orav jeXsviiiaco^ /jItJts 
iv xgvoS drjre^ /XTfTS iv dgyvgcp /jtijxs iv dkXcp 
firfSsvl^ dkXd rjf yi) cog zdyiGTa dnoSois. Ti 
ydg TOVTOV /xaxagc^Tsgov tov yj) /^itydTJvat^ if 
Ttdvza fisv xd xaAa, ndvxa Si x ay add cpvsL ts 
xal jgicpsc ; 'JEyco Si xal dXXcog cpikdvdgaTtog 
iysvourfv, xal vvv rjSecog dv f,toi Soxet xotvcovij- 
cat xov evsgyixovvxog dvOgconovg. — Xenophon. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 139 

8. 

^laoxgdirfg xaxcajov ag^ovra sXsyev sivai^ tov 
ag^stv iaviov firj Svvdfxsvov. ^JEgcoTrfOslg^ Std 
noiav ahtav lovg dXXovs ScSdaxov XayBLv, avzo^ 
cfLcoTta^ ecprf • xal ydg y\ dxovtf avjiq fxiv ov re- 
fivEi^ id 8s ^icpri o^ia tiolsL 'JEgoTT^Oelgj tlvl ot 
cpiXonovoL Tcov gadvucov dcacpegovcftv / sltzsv^ ws 
ot evGs^sig Tcou dosjicov^ aXnlGLv dyadats. ^IScov 
vsavLUv (ptXoTtovovvxa^ e(prf • xdXki(jTOv oxpov tS 
y^gaiL dgivsig. AdXov jLvog a^oXd'CsLv nag^ 
aiJzw [3ovXo^uivov, Striovg jjirjas fiiodovg • tov 
8i Tijv atTtav nvdofievov • ^'Eva fisv (k'cpjj), iva 
XaXsLv fxdOzfg^ tov Si azegovy iVa acydv. 



VOCABULARY 



12 



VOCABULARY, 



A. 

dyados, jj^ oV, good ; brave. 

dj^dnrf, rjs^ ?), love. 

dyyeXo<;, ov^ 6, a messenger, 

dysvvr^Tog^ ov, 6, 7^, (j^evvdo) unbegotten* 

^'Aytg^ iSog^ 6, Agis. 

dyxvga^ as. t^^ an anchor. 

a;^cj, a|63, ?/;^a and dyrjo^^a, Wf^oLt^ Ear. Aor. 

ijyayov^ lo lead; to drive; a/f, come on. 
dyav^ covog^ 6, a contest, a combat ; a game. 
dj^covLtofxac, (jOfjLui^ ^ySpLOfiatj to contend, to 

fight for a prize. 
ddsXcpGSj ov, o, a brother. 
a5?/g, 01^5 6, Hades, the infernal world. 
ddixio^ rjacj^ ^Stxrixa^ (^dixrf) to do injustice, to 

injure. 
dSixrii.ia, arog, xo^ an act of injustice, an offence. 
dSiXLu, ag, j/, injustice, injury. 
dSixo?^ 01/, 6, ?/, unjust. 
ddixcog^ unjustly. 

dSo^ia, ag, ?^, (5o|a) want of reputation; dishonor. 
a5aj, a(7«, (contr. from daibco) to sing. 



144 VOCABULARY. 

dsi ojid auiy always. 

dddvuTog, oj/, 6, ?/, (ddvaiog) immortaL 

ddecog^ (deog) impiously; wickedly. 

""^dijvat^ c3v, at, Athens. 

^ Adiivaiog^ a, or, Athenian, 

ddXrjTijs^ ov, 6, (ddXoSy a combat) a wrestler, a 

combatant in the games. 
''Adcog^ 69, 6, Athos, a mountain. 
Atyvmog^ ov, 7^, Egypt. 
AlyvTCTLogy ov, 6, Egyptian. 
atdsofxat^ovfiat^ alSkao^aL^ rfSscffiai^ ydiodrfv, (at- 

5«g) to respect, to reverence; to be ashamed. 
atSag^ ovg, 7/, respect, reverence, decorum, mod- 
esty, shame. 
atxt^o, Pass, o^iat^ to treat with ignominy, to 

torture, to harass. 
atgsTog, rj, oV, eligible ; preferable. 
algico^ co, ijao, rfgrfxa. Ear. Aor. elXov^ to take, 

to seize ; Mid. algiofiaL^ ovfiat^ elkofxr^v^ to 

take to one's self, to choose. 
ai(J/g6g, a, oV, ugly ; base, disgraceful. 
ata^vvrf, rfg, r/, shame, disgrace ; modesty. 
aio/vvcj, vvco, 7f<^X^y^o(., to shame, J\Iid. ata/vvo- 

(lai^ to be ashamed of; to reverence. 
atxico, c5, 7J0CD, ffTTfxa^ to ask. 
ahia^ ag, 7^, a cause. 
atcDv^ cjvog, 6, time, a space of time; an age; 

eternity. 
dxLvdxtfg, OV, 6, a Persian sword, a scimetar. 
dxovTf^ rfSj Tfj a whetstone. 



VOCABULARY. 145 

dxovco, dxovdofiat^ dxrjxoa, to hear ; Perf. Pass. 
rjxovG[jiaL 

axgoTtoXtg^ fog, ^, (axgos^ jroAtg) an upper tow- 
er, a citadel. 

dxTij^ TJg, 7^, (dyvvfii^ dyco^ to break) a broken, 
rocky shore, a shore, 

dXyjOeiUj a?, r), truth. 

dXrid}\g^ f og, ovg, 6, ^ true. 

dXrfdSg^ truly. 

aAx?^^, strength, vigor. 

dXXd, but. 

aAArAwv, oiyg, of each other ; JYom. not used. 

dkXog^ Tf^ o, another; ot dXXoL^ the rest (ceteri). 

aXXcog^ otherwise, in other respects. 

dXoyiarog^ ov, 6, i]^ (a priv. and Xoyog) irration- 
al, inconsiderate. 

aXSnrf^^ sxog, ?/, a fox. 

dfjiuOi/g, iog^ 6, ?/, (uavddvco) unlearned, ignorant. 

dfiaOia, ag, 9^, ignorance. 

dfjcagidvco^ dfjcagTrjOO), i^fidgrrfxa^ Ear, Aor, rffxag- 
Toi/, to err; to miss; to commit ofEencje. 

dfiagzta^ ag, t^, error, fault; sin. 

d^isXcjg. (fxiXsi^ curae est) negligently, careless- 
ly ; dasXSg e/stv, to be neglectful. 

dfxmcog^ ogog^ 6, ?^^ (i^^^V?) niotherless. 

dfinsXSv^ (ovog^ 6, a vineyard. 

dv, employed with verbSj gives to them the idea of 
iincertaiikty and mere possibility ; thus, eXsyov^ 
I was speaking, eXsyov dv, I would be speak- 
ing; riXOov, I came, riXdov dv, I would have 
12* 



146 VOCABULARY. 

come ; Xsyoifiiy I might speak, Xij^otfii av, I 

might perhaps speak, 
av, for edv or rjv^ if, distinguished from the for- 
mer by beginning a clause. 
avaliaivco^ JiijaofjiaL, ^e^rfxa, Ear. Jlor. dvi^tfVj 

(jSaivco) to go up, to ascend. 
dva[it(idZco^ daco^ (^t^d^coj /3a^Gj, jiaivo^ /3aa) to 

cause to ascend. 
dvayiyvcoaxco, yvcDoo^at^ eyvoyca, (ytyv^axco) 

Ear. Jlor. dvij/vav^ to read. 
dvayxalog^ a, or, necessary, unavoidable. 
dvdyxij, ifg^ 7^, necessity. 
ai/a|, xTog, 6, a king, a prince. 
dv€Lfitj Inf. dvuvai^ Part, dvccov^ Imperf. Past. 

dvjjsiv^ (dvd, SL(XL^ to go, see § 61) to go up, 

to ascend. 
oivefxos, ov, 6, wind. 
avev^ with gen., without. 
dvevgidxco^ gijoco^ Jlor. di/sygov, (^evgiaxo) to find 

out, to discover. 
dvi]g^ dvSgog, d, a man. 
dvdog, eog ovg^ to, a flower. 
dvdg^TtLvog, rj, ov, pertaining to man, human. 
dvdgoTcog, ov, 6, a human being, a man. 
dviagog, d, ov, (dvca, sadness, trouble) sad, 

troublesome. 
dvidco, 6, daco, to cause pain, to grieve (rcvd) 

any one ; Mid. dvL^fiai, to grieve. 
dvLozi^fxL, aijjaco, soirfxa, (iairffit) to set up, to 

raise up ; dvaoirjvac, to rise. 



VOCABULARY. 147 

dvoSvgofiat^ ^or. Mid. dvcoSvgdfirfv^ {oSvgo^ai^ 
oSvgco) to wail aloud. 

dvTiXeyco, |63, to speak against, to contradict. 

dvTiTcagaoxevd^a^ doco^ (^axevd^o, axevos) to pre- 
pare against; Mid. to prepare one's self 
against. 

^^i/TtoOsvrfg^ €os ovg^ Antisthenes. 

dvjgov^ ov, TO, a cavern. 

dvoOav^ from above ; upper. 

a|^og, a, 0]/, wortliy. 

dogdiog^ ov, 6, ?^, (ogdo, to see) invisible. 

dnayyiXXo^ fA©, i'jyysXxa^ {dyyiXXo) to bear 
back word, to report. 

dnaXXayri^ ijg, ?/, a release, liberation. 

dnaXXdjTco^ d^co, dnykXa^^a, Ear. Jior. Pass. 
dnijXXdyijv, to liberate, to free ; Mid. djiaX- 
Xdzzeodat, to depart. 

aziag, aaa, av, all, every. 

dndiTf^ ?/g, ?^, {ditaxdco^ to deceive) deception, 
fraud, deceit. 

dndicog, ogog^ 6, ?/, (jtazrjg) without a father. 

dnai^tj Inf. dntsvat^ Pari, dntavj (duo^ stfity to 
go, see ^ 61) to go away, to depart. 

dnetgag (dneLgog^ inexperienced, not having 
proved) a/etv dneigcog xivog^ to be unac- 
quainted with any thing. 

dTteg/ofxaij iXevaofiai^ ihjkvOci, Aor. dniiXdov^ 
(eg/ofxai) to go away, to depart. 

dnoiidkXw^ /SaAaJ, fiijiXrfxa, (jiaXXo) to cast 
away, to loose. 



148 VOCABULARY. 

dTtoStSgdcixcOj SgdacOy SsSgaxa, (Sgdc)) Jlor. dni' 

Sgdv^ to run away (as a servant). 
aTtoSiScofjit^ Scoaco, SsScoxaj (8idof.u) to give back, 

to restore, .^o pay; Mid. d7to8i8o{iai^ to sell. 
djtodvr'jaxG), darovfxat, {dvjjaxa)) to die ; ^or. 

djiiOavov. 
dnoTCTSLvo, svcj^ dnixTova, Lot. Aor. dnkxxuva^ 

(xTEivo) to slay. 
ditoXuTtG)^ yjG), XekoiTta and XeXsicpa, Aor, sXtnoVj 

(Xstjto) to leave behind, to abandon. 
djioXXvfii, {oXXv^l) oAe3, coXexa^ Aor. SXaaa, to 

destroy ; Mid. dnoXXyfiat, oXov^iat, Aor. dno- 

Xofjiffv, to perish. So Ear. Per/. Act. dTtoXo- 

Aa, 1 am undone, I perish. 
^jinoXXcov^ (ovog^ 6, Apollo. 
duofiavOdvco (dno, (.lavddvco) to unlearn. 
aTtoaieXXcOy sXa, duaoTaXxa^ Lat. Aor. dTiiazetXa, 

(azsXXc)) to send forth, to send away. 
aTtoacpdiTco, aipd^co, (acpdrico) to slaughter, to 

murder, to stab ; Mid. dTtoacpdTTOfiatj to stab 

one's self. 
u7toTvyxdy<o, Tsv^ofiat, Ear. Aor, dTterv/ov, (rvy- 

xdvco) to fail of, not to obtain. 
aTCocpavyco^ cpev^ofiai^ duoiiBcpsvya^ Aor. dnicpV" 

yov^ {duo, cpevyco) to flee away, to escape. 
aTTTG), dxpco^ ?)9?a, Aor. ^i/^a, to fasten or appl}^ 

one thing to another, hence to kindle, to set 

on fire, by bringing the torch in contact with 

the fire ; Mid. dTtTOfiai, to connect one's self 

with, to lay hold of, to cling to. 



VOCABULARY. 



149 



''Agyo?, ovg, to, Argos, a city in Argolis. 

^Agyog^ oVy 6, Argus. 

agyvgo^^ ov, 6, silver. 

dgioxo, dgeooy rjgsafiai, -^giadrfv, to please.. 

dgsTijj rjg, Tf^ virtue. ,>i 

""AgidSvrjj ris, ?/, Ariadne. 

^AgiOTiTcno^^ ov, 6, Aristippus.. 

oigiOTog^ rf^ ov, best. 

^y^giozoTsXT^gy soSj 6, Aristotle. 

agfiay aiog, to, a chariot. 

dgfidzatog, a, ov, pertaining to a chariot. 

'Agixovia, ag, ?^, H arm on i a. 

dgnayij, rj?^ rj, {dgnd^co) a seizure, robbery. 

dggrjv^ hvog^ 6, 7], male. 

a^Ti/Gj, vjw, jjgzvxa, (dgco^ to join, to fit) to join, 

to put together, to prepare. 
dg/ij, rjg, 7^, a beginning, a taking the lead, a 

government. 
oigxo, |«, yg^oL, to begin, to take the lead of, to 

govern ; Mid. dg/ofxai, to begin (for one's 

self). 
dg/av, ovTog, 6, a ruler, a magistrate. 
dasjiijg^ £og, 6, ?^, (aejico) impious. 
doOevEco, 6, rjoG), i^aOevrfxa, (adivos^ strength) 

to be weak, to be sick. 
dodsvjjg, ig, fog, 6, tJ, weak, infirm, sick. Comp. 

dodsvsozegog. 
daxicoj «, jjaa, ijax-qxa^ to exercise, to train, to 

practise. 
dazTJg, igog^ 6, a star. 



150 VOCABULARY, 

a(?Ti/, 6og, TO, a city. 

^^aivd/rfgy eog^ 6, Astyages. 

dacpaXrjs^ iog, 6, t^, (acpdXXco) safe, secure* 

"'udzgetdrfg, ov^ 6, Atrides, son of Atreus. 

dTv/ia^ a?, 7^, {tvxVi) misfortune, 

avTog^ TJj o, self (ipse) ; mth the article^ the 

same ; in the oblique cases alofie, him, her, it ; 

see § 21 J Tuvja^ these things; lavxa (m 

avTd)y the same things. 
d<pav7Jg, iogj 6, ?^, {cpaivco} not conspicuous, 

obscure, invisible. 
dcpiaxrifAL^ dito(jTi\ao^ dcpsarrfxa^ Aor. ditioTriv^ to 

remove, to cause to withdraw ; Mid. d^iaza^ 

fiai, to withdraw, to cease from. 
''^(pgoSirrf, tjg^ 7), Venus. 

dcpQoovvrfyrig, 7^, (cicpgcov) folly, want of sense. 
a(pg(0Vj ovog, (cpQT^v) senseless, foolish. 
dcpavog, ou^ 6, 7), (q)ovrj) without voice, dumby 

speechless. 
dxagLOTtaj a^y ?^, (x^9^^} ingratitude. 
d/dgiaxog^ ov, 6, ^, ungrateful. 
axOofxai^ eoo/xat^ (d^dog^ dyay) to be burdened, 

to grieve, to be disgusted, 

B. 

jSa^v^, 6ra, 1/, deep. 

^dkXoj /3aA(», j3f/3A?^xa, ^or. ej3aXov^ to cast, to 

throw, to shoot. 
pagvg^ fta, i>, heavy, oppressive. 
^dgog^ €og^ to', a weight, a burden. 



I 



VOCABULARY. 151 

fiagvvco, vvco, ^s^dgvyxa^ (jSagvs) to burden, to 
weigh down, to oppress ; J\Iid. ^agvvofiac^ to 
become heavy. 

jiaaavL^G), iaco^ {^daavog, a touchstone) to try 
by applying to a touchstone, to try, to prove. 

(iaatXeta^ a^, tj^ a reign, a kingdom. 

^aolXsLovy ov, TO, and ^aoiXeia^ cov^ tcc, a royal 
abode, a palace. 

fiaatXevs^ icog^ 6, a king. 

fiijiaLog^ ov, 6, ^, and 05, a, ov, firm, sure, per- 
manent. 

fieXog^ £og, TO, (/3aAAcj), a missile weapon. 

^sXiLcov^ ovog^ 6, ^, (dyaOog) better; ^skTcaios^ 
best. 

^m, ag, ?^, force, violence. 

jiiog, ov^ 6, life, a livelihood. 

^Xa^egos^ a, oV, {^kd^ri, /^iaTTTGj,) injurious. 

^Xdnia^ xfjo^ /Si/^Aaqpa, to injure. 

pXdoTi^fia^ aiog^ to', (jiXaoidvco) a bud, shoot, 
flower. 

pxiitco^ yjcj, jisliXs(pa^ to look at, to see, to behold. 

Botaiia, ag, ?/, Boeotia. 

fioigvg^ vog, 6, a cluster of grapes. 

fiovXofxai^ jiovXrjao/Aat^ ^s^ovXijfxai^ to will, to 
choose. 

jiovg^ ^oog, 6, ?/, an ox, a cow, a bull. 

jSgaSsog, {(igaSvg^ slow) slowly. 

^gayvg, sta, v, short, brief. 

figovDJ^ ijg, f], thunder. 

fico{i6g. ov^ 6, an altar. 



152 VOCABULAKt. 

r. 

ydg^ for. 

yaaxrig^ egos, ^, a belly, stomach. 

/i gives emphasis and distinctness to the word 
with which it is connected, certainly, particu- 
larly, at least, 

yeXdco^ «, dao^ ysyiXayca, to laugh. 

ysvsxr]^ rjs, ?/, (y^evog) birth. 

yavvalos, a, ov, noble, excellent. 

ysvvatcosj nobly ; courageously. 

yevvdco, ^,r\a(o, yeysvvrixa, to beget, to produce. 

yivog, fog, ovs^ to, a race, descent, kind. 

yecpvga, ag, ?y, a bridge. 

yiy, yiis, rj, the earth ; a land. 

yriXo(pog, ov, 6, (y^, Xocpos, a hill) a rising ground, 
a hill. 

y^gag, axog, to, old age. 

yiyvof.iat, (yiv(o obs.) ysvjjaofxaL, yiyova, Pass. 
ysyevri[iaty Ear. Aor. Mid. iyevofirjv, to be- 
come, to happen. 

yiyvSaxcOy yvSaoiiat^ syvcjxa, Aor. syvcov, to know. 

yXvTtvg, eta, v, sweet, Comp. yXvxtcov. 

yX6aaa, rfg, rj, the tongue. 

yv6fi7j, rig, ^, (yvoo, id. qu. ytyv6(^xo) senti- 
ment, opinion, judgment. 

yovsyg, sag, 6, (yivG), yiyvofxat) a generator, a 
father; ot ;^ovfrg, parents. 

ygata, ag, ?;, (ysgatog) an old woman. 

ygdfxfjLay aiog, to, (ygdcpci)) any thing written, 



VOCABULARY. 153 

writing ; PL id ygdfxfiaia^ letters, literature, 

the elements of knowledge, 
ygdcpco^ xpco^ yeygacpa^ to write, to paint. 
FgvXXog^ ov, 6, Gryllus. 
yvvrjy yvvaixos^ ?/, a woman. 

J. 

Saifxav^ ovosy 6, a divinity, daemon. 

Sdxvco^ (dax, Sifx) Sij^oixat, di8rf;(a, aSaxoVy Pass. 

8i8ijyf.LaL^ to bite. 
Sdxgvov, ovj to, a tear. 
Saxgvco^ vao, to shed tears, to weep. 
8dfiaXi?y ecog, ?/, a heifer. 
Javaos^ ovj 6, Danaus. 

Javaoi^ cov^ ol^ descendants of Danaus, Grecians. 
5i, a particle of connection^ whether copulative or 

disjunctive; and, but. 
8h, SubJ. Seif^ Opt. Sioiy Inf. Setv, Part. SioVy 

Put. Ssijasi, it is necessary. 
Ssida^ SsLOOfiai^ SeSta and SiSotxa^ to fear, Perf 

SiSoLxa^ I fear. 
SsLxvvui^ dsi^co, Perf. Pass. SiSstyuai^ to show. 
SblXos^ ?/, oV, (detSco, to fear) cowardly, timid. 
SsLvo?, 7Jj or, (Seas, fear) fearful, dreadful ; 

he7ice applied to any thing which inspires strong 

feeling, as mighty, powerful, grievous, strange; 

as^ Sstvog Xsysiv, niighty to speak ; Setvog i^sv- 

guv Ttogovg, skilful to find out expedients. 

Comp. detvoTsgoSy Sup. SHvoxaxos. 
Sixa^ ten. 

13 



154 VOCABULARY. 

Ssxdnrixv?^ v, (Sexa, nrj^vs) ten cubits long. 

Sigf^ia^ arog, to, a skin, a hide, 

SsaficoTijgLov^ oi/, to, (Seaiiog, a bond, Sio, to 
bind) a prison, 

dedTtorrfg, ov, 6, a master, a lord. 

Sixoixuiy Se^o[,iatj SiSsj^fiat^ to receive. 

5?^' (contr. from rjSi^)^ at this moment, already, 
at once ; hence introduced constantly to give 
liveliness and vigor to discourse ; answers to 
our you see, indeed, 8fc. 

^rifioadevTfg, sag. ovg, Demosthenes. 

SiapaLvco^ j3i^ao[jiaL, ^e^rfxa^ Sis^riv, ((iaiv(o) to 
go through, to cross over. 

SiayiyvcDdycco^ yvSaof^iaL, eyvoxa^ (yiyvcx^xo) to 
distinguish. 

Sidyco^ |«, to lead through, to lead across ; with 
ellipsis of ;f?oVoi/, to spend one's time, to 
continue. 

Siaycovt'Coiiai^ taofiai^ ScrfySvKjfiacj to keep con- 
tending. 

StadLdcoi^u^ S6(j(o^ SiScjxa, (Stdcofii) to distribute. 

didkvdLg^ ecog^ t^, (Xvoy to loose) separation, dis- 
solution. 

Stakva^ acj, 8LaXsXvyca^ {Xvco) to dissolve. 

diafxivoj e5, dca^isfjiivrfxa^ {jllsvco) to remain, to 
stay, to continue. 

Siavsfio, CO, StavsvefjiTfxa, to share, to allot, to 
distribute. 

ScacfxdTtrcjy ipco, (dxaTtro) to dig through, un- 
dermine. 



VOCABULARY. 155 

Stajd^aco, ^co^ dcaTixa^a, (xdadco) to dispose, to 
arrange, to regulate. 

StaTsXio^ (5, iaco, dLajsreXexaj {xeXeco) to accom- 
plish, to continue, or spend one's time ; Sia- 
TeXsc fiavdavav, he spends his time learning. 

Siaxgi^co^ yjco, SiarsTQC^a^ Per/. Pass. jeTgcfi- 
fiatj (jQi^co) to wear away, to consume, to 
spend*time. 

8iaq)e§co, oiao^ Aor. dtyjvsyxa^ (^cpigco) to differ, 
to surpass. 

ScacpyXdiTco^ ^co, ((pvXdiTcOy (pvXa^, a guard) to 
continue guarding, to preserve. 

SiSaaxaXuov^ oi/, to, a place of instruction, a 
school. 

ScddaxaXo?, ov, 6, a teacher. 

dcddoxo^ Sidd^co^ SsStSaxaj Sedi8a}^fxai^ to teach. 

StScofxif Saaco, SiScjxaj to give. 

Siig^o/xaiy aXevao^iai^ iXijXvday Aor. StijlOov^ to 
go through. 

dcxd^G), daco, (Sixrj^ justice) to judge, to adminis- 
ter justice, to pronounce sentence ; Mid. Sc- 
xdtof.iaty to conduct a suit. 

dixaiog^ a, o?/, just. 

Scxatoavvr)^ ?/?, 7^, justice. 

8txaicog, justly. 

SixaaTTfi^ ov, 6, a judge. 

SixYi^ ri<5^ ^j justice, a suit at law. 

Jtoyivrfs, eog^ 6, Diogenes. 

SioLxicoy «, TJfiG), dtcoxrixaj (oixog) to regulate 
household affairs, to dispose, to administer. 



156 VOCABULARY. 

8iogv66co^ |cj, Stcogv/Uy (ogva^co) to dig through. 

8ig^ twice. 

8itt6s^ 7/, ovj and SlcKjos^ double. 

dicpgog^ ov, 6, (dig and (pegca, 8L(pogog, bearing 
two) a charioteer's seat. 

Siipogy eos^ to, (dtxpa) thirst. 

di6xco^ ^co^ 8e8i(oya, to pursue. 

8fx(07J^ rjsy 7^5 a maid-servant. 

8oxsco^ «, 5o|g3, Pei^f. Pass. 8i8oy^aij to think, 
to seem; 80x^1^ it seems good; 8i8oxTaty it 
is resolved upon. 

So^Uy Tfg, 7^, an opinion, estimation, reputation, 
glory. 

8ovXo9y ov, 6, a slave, a subject of despotic powder. 

8vva^aiy 8vv7J(jO[xat^ 8s8vv7ffiaL, i8vv7J67fVy to be 
able ; Part. 8vpoifi£vog. 

Svpaareta^ ag, 7^, (Svvaiiai) power, official au- 
thority, sway. 

8vo and 8vco^ two. 

SvofjtaLy 8vaoixatj i8v(jdfii^v^ (8vco^ to submerge) 
to go under, to set ; as the sun, from his be- 
ing supposed to sink in the ocean. 

8v(jTvyJco^ w, riaco^ (8vg and rvyrfy fortune) to be 
unfortunate. 

8vcnvyiay a?, 7), misfortune. 

SSgovy 01/, TO, (86(0, 8i8co{jLi) a gift. 

idv, with Subj. if. 

iavTov, i^g, ov, of himself, herself, &fc. 



VOCABULARY. 157 

iyyvst ivith Gen. near. 

iyxaXio^ co, iao^ iyxixXrfxa^ (xaXeto) to accuse, 
to inculpate. 

syxXrifxa, arog^ to, a charge, an accusation. 

iy6j ifxov or fiov^ I. 

££, if, tcith Lid. and Opt. 

stSco (obs.), Ear. Aor. eidov^ to see. See ogdco. 

stSoXov, (siSog^ a form) an image, a picture. 

elSaSy knowing, Per/. Part, from oiSa, quod vide. 

etxo, to be like, to resemble, to seem ; fotxa, it 
seems, it resembles. 

stxog^ oTog^ to, that which is like, that which is 
probable, natural. 

SLxcoVj ovog, 7/j an image. 

€ifii^ to be. See § 65. 

sifiij Inf. uvai^ Part, tav^ (see ^ 65) to go. 

€i7tov, I spoke, I said, Ear. Jlor.from eno (obs.). 

elgrji-ievogy 7/, ov. Pass. Part, of geco. 

etgjjvjf^ 7/g, ?/, peace. 

elgy f.ua^ fV, one. 

staskavvo, staeXdacoj dasXrikaxa^ (iAavvco) to 
drive into, to ride or march into. 

BLdsgxouai^ iXevaojxat, ihj?.vda^ Ear. Aor. elarjl' 
Oov^ to come into. 

exaoTog, r/, ov, each, every one. 

ixarov^ a hundred. 

ixSecgcj^ sgS, ixSiSagxa^ (Segco) to flay, to skin. 

ixHvog, ij, o, he, that person. 

exxXriaia^ a?, ?), (xaXio^ to call) a popular as- 
sembly. 

13* 



158 VOCABULARY. 

ixTilio^ svaco^ neTtXevxa^ (ix, TtXio) to sail out, 

to sail away. 
ixTtoteoy (5, TJao. nsTioirfxaf to complete, to make, 

to deliver. 
ixros^ outside, without. 
ix6v^ ovauj oV, willing, voluntary. 
ikdrzcovy ovos^ o, ?/, less, smaller. 
iXavvco^ iXdaco^ Att sXcq^ iXriXaxa^ ihjXafiaL, i^ld- 

driv, to drive ; elliptically^ to advance, to march. 
eXaxidTos^ ?/, oz/. Sup. of eXaxxov^ least, smallest. 
iXeeco, c5, TJaco^ (I'Afog, pity) to pity, to compas^ 

sionate. 
iXsriixoavvrf, 7^g, 7^, pity, alms. 
iXsvdegog^ a, ov, free. 

"^JShxSv, covog^ 6, Helicon, a mountain in B(zotia. 
^'jBAAa?, a5og, ?^, Greece. 
^'EXXriv^ Tfvog, 6, a Grecian. 
""EXX^a/tovTog^ ov, 6, the Hellespont. 
iXXcTtrfg, iog^ 6, r), [Xsltzco, to leave) deficient. 
iXut'Co^ LOCO, TjXntxa^ to hope, to expect. 
iXntgj idog^ -q^ hope, expectation. 
f^j3aAA«, jSaXcoj (H^Xrfxa^ Aor. avs^aXov, (jSaA- 

Ao) to throw or cast in ; elliptically^ to empty 

or discharge itself, as a river, 
ifxfisvo, evS^ ififieijiivrfxa^ (fisvo) to remain in, 

to endure, to continue. 
ifjLog^ 7/, oV, my, mine. 
ifjLTtiTtio^ 7Z€(jovfiaL^ ifiTtsTtroxay Aor. iveTtsaov^ 

(TtLTtTco) to fall in or among. 
ifjiTiXyjdc)^ ijdcoj (TtXrjdo) to be full, to be satisfied. 



VOCABULARY. 159 

ificpigco^ ivoioco^ ((pegco) to bring in. 

ivSeofiai, ivSetodai, to want, to need, icith Gen. 

ivSvco^ Svaoj ivdidvxa^ to enter in, to put on ; 

Mid. ivSvofiai^ to put upon one's self. 
evsxa, on account of, with Gen. 
ivvea^ nine. 
iviavda^ here. 

ivTohj, TJSj ifj (ivzeXXoj to command) a com- 
mand, a charge. 
i^aigecjj co^ TJao, tfxa^ ..9 or. i^eilov^ (algico) to 

take out, to take away forcibly ; Mid. i^at- 

govuai^ to select, to take out. 
i^aXucpco^ xfjco, Per/. Pass. i^aXi\Xi^if,LaL. to wipe 

out, to etiace, to obliterate (aXetipco). 
i^sgxouaL^ i^sXsvGOfiai^ i^eh/lvduy Jlor. i^j]kdoyj 

(sg/ouai) to come out. 
i^eid^co^ docoy to examine, to try. 
inatvca, 6, eaco^ (alvog) to praise. 
' EnauivcovSas^ ov^ 6, Epaminondas. 
insi, since, when, after. 

ineLddv, (iTtetSij and dv) icith SubJ. when, after. 
inecdij, since, after, when. 

eitsLxay {ijii^ uza) then, afterwards, Lat. deinde. 
iniygdipcoj ipco^ yiygacpa^ (79^^^) ^^ write upon, 

to inscribe. 
iriLdvfxia, ag, ?/, (dvt.i6s) desire. 
inixgaTecOy «, jjaco, xexgdnjxa^ (xgdioSy force) 

to conquer, to overcome. 
BTtLuikeLa, asj 7), {ini^ /xelst, curae est) care. 
iniarfuog, 6, 7^, {(^ijua) distinguished. 



160 VOCABULARY. 

iTtidycoTBco^ (5, 7/(>c?, {dxoTos^ darkness) to darken, 

to obscure. 
iitiaTaaai^ Imp. Part. STttciToifirfv^ Fut. inLax^ao' 

fjiat, to know. 
iTttaTrjfiri^ r^g^ ri^ (iTtttjTafjtat) application, study, 

knowledge. 
iTtiOToXij^ TJs, rij (ini^ axeXXco^ to send) an epistle. 
eTtLTijSevoy sv(jco^ to be employed with, to pur- 
sue, to practise. 
enKpsgo^ otoo, ivrivox(x, ivi^vsyfiat^ Aor. Act. 

i\veyKa, ((fsgco) to bring to, to bring upon, or 

against ; Mid. iTrKpegofiaij to bear one's self 

upon, to rush upon. 
fTTTa, seven. 
ig/dtofiat^ daof^tat, Sigya(jfiai, (egyov^ a work) to 

work, to labor, to perform. 
igyaaLUy ag, 7), a working, labor, an occupation. 
igydxip. uv, 6, a laborer, a workman, a performer. 
eg/ov, ov, to, a work, labor, deed, business. 
igicj^ », (see geay) to say. 
igi^cjy iao, (sgts, strife) to strive, to contend. 
^Ugfiijs^ ov, o, Mercury. 
igv{.iv6g, ?^, 6v^ fortified. 
egyofiai^ eXsvdouoLij iXijXvda^ Jlor. ^kdov^ to 

come. 
igoido, a, ?/(>«, -^gcorrfxa, to interrogate, to ask. 
is for siSj into, to. 
iadrjg, rjiog^ 7], (iodsoy to clothe, from evvv^i, to 

put on) clothing. 
saOiC) (s8co)j Fut. eSofxat^ idijSoxay iSjjSeOfAaij 

"^deadr^Vy to eat. 



VOCABULARY. 161 

€6T€ and ioj' avy until. 

exsQOSy a, ov, the other of two. 

hiy Still, even now, further. 

hoLfiog, ?/, ov, ready, prepared. 

£v, well. 

evyiveta^ a?, ?), (fv, yivo^) high birth, nobility. 

Bvyevrjg^ iog, 6, //, well-born, noble. 

evSai/jLovioy c3, 7^(yGj, (evSaiuou) to be happy. 

ev8aif.Lovia^ a?, ?/, happiness, prosperity. 

evdatuovy ovoSy 6, ?/, (fv, Saiuov) happy, pros- 
perous. 

evsgyeiecjy «, ijaw, (fv, egyov) to benefit, to do 
good to. 

evxXeia, a?, r/, (xXiog) renow^n, glory. 

EvxXsiSyjgy ovy 6, Euclid. 

svka;3eouaL, ovuaij jjoofiai, to beware of, to 
shun, to be on one's guard. 

€vvov/ogy ov, 6, (svvij^ s^co) a eunuch. 

EvgLTiidyjSy ov, 6, Euripides. 

avgioxc}^ evgyjaco^ evgyfxa^ ^dor. avgov^ to find ; to 
invent. 

evgvg, fTa, v, wide, broad. 

svaeiSeia, ag, ?/, (fi5(y^/3?;g) piety. 

evasjiijgj iog, 6, ?/, (ev^ o^iico) pious. 

svTvxloiegos^ Cojnp. of Bvjvyi\g. 

evTvx^co, CO, 7/(;o, (fv, ti^;^?/) to be fortunate. 

evzv/7jg, iog, 6, ?/, fortunate, prosperous. 

evTvytay ag, t^, good fortune, prosperity. 

evxo^ai, ev^oj^iaiy evy^ai^ to pray, to supplicate, 
to desire. 



162 VOCABULARY. 

av(pogos, 6, tfj (fv, (psgco) fruitful. 

€(prf^os^ ov, 0, a grown young man. 

i(ptG>Trff^tiy i7ti(jZ7J<ycjy icpeOTrixa, to place on or by ; 

aTticiTifv, I stood near. 
ixOgoSy a, oV, hostile; i^dgog, ov^ 6, an enemy. 
s^coj e^o or (JX^jcfo, ea^^rixa^ Aor> ea^ov, to have. 
ecjs, until. 

Z. 

tdo, c5, (^7J(jOj ^TJaofiai^ e^rixa^ rare) to live ; at 

^covxesj the living. 
^€v/vvfxty ^ev^co, e^sv^ay {t^vyo^ obs.) to yoke, to 

harness, to join. 
Zsvsy Jios and Zrivog, Jupiter. 
^rffiiay a?5 ^, loss, punishment. 
ZtJvoVj 6)1/09, 6, Zeno. 
^rfjiwy eS, T^co, i^rjzrjxa^ to seek. 
^7jT7f(ji?y ecosy 71^ seeking, search, asking. 
<CG)rfy rj?j ?/, (tdco^ to live) life. 
^e5ov, ov, TO, a living creature, an animal. 

H. 

i^ysfi6v, ovog^ 6, a leader, a conductor, a guide. 

T^yiofiat^ ovfiaty jjaofiai^ rlyrffiaty (oiya) to lead, 
conduct, guide ; to think. 

jfdsLVy (from oiSa) I knew. 

7^dieos^ with pleasure, willingly. 

rjSrfy at this moment, at once, immediately, al- 
ready ; moreover, even. 

i^dov^, rjg^ tf^ pleasure. 



VOCABULARY. 163 

T^Svs^ ata, V, sweet, pleasant. 
^xiaxa^ least, in the least degree. 
rjxco^ ij^Oj to come ; Pres. I am come. 
^Udtog^ a, ov^ stupid, foolish. 
T^hxtaTrjg, ov, 6, one of the same age, a con- 
temporary, a mate. 
TjUxos^ rj, ov, what sort of, how large. 
ijfAto?, ov^ 6, the sun. 
T^fjiiga, a?, 7^, a day. 
"Hga^ a?, 7^, Juno. 
'^ HgaxXsrjg, iovg^ 6, Hercules. 
rjjTcov^ ovog^ 6, ?/, less, inferior; JX^eut. jjttov. 
"H(pataiogj oi/, 6, Vulcan. 
^;^c&, 00? ovg, ?/, echo. 

0. 

ddXaaaa^ rfg, ij^ the sea. 

Odvaxog^ ov, 6, (Ovrjaxo) death. 

ddnzco^ tpcoj Tida^^iaL^ to bury. 

Oav/xaaiog^ ?/, oV, (^davfia^ a wonder) wonderful, 
admirable. 

diafxa^ aiog^ to, (Oedofjiai^ to survey) a specta- 
cle, a sight. 

deiogj a, or, divine. 

6i}.(o^ jjao, jlor. T^Oilr^aay to will, to wish, to 
choose. 

Osog^ ov, 6, a god. 

degiOfiog^ ov, 6, (dsgi^o^ to reap) a harvest. 

dtfgsvco^ 6(0y (dijga, a hunt) to hunt, to pursue. 

Orfgiov, ovy to', {d-qg) a wild beast. 



164 VOCABULARY. 

drfdavgos, ov, 6, a treasure. 

0rja£V9^ icog, 6, Theseus. 

Oi^ijaxco, davovaai, redvrfxa^ Aor. edavov^ to die. 

dvijTo?^ 7Jy oV, mortal. 

dogvjiog^ ov, o, a tumult, disturbance. 

dvydxijQ^ egog^ ?), a daughter. 

0i;^a, azo?, to, incense, an offering, a sacrifice. 

Ovfxog^ ov, 6, passion, anger ; desire. 

Ovga, ag, t^, a door. 

/. 

t^^og, a, or, one's own, peculiar, private. 

tegovj ov, TO, (JW?/^. of tsgog) any thing conse- 
crated ; a temple. 

ixavog, ly oV, adequate, sufficient, fit, consid- 
erable. 

iVa, in order that. 

^' Iva/og^ OV, 6, Inachus. 

60?, OV, 6, poison. 

iTtTtog, OV, 6, a horse. 

""laoxgdii^g, sog, 6, Isocrates. 

''lagaijX, (indeclinable) Israel. 

laryjfu, (jx-qaco, to place ; aarricia, I placed ; Ear. 
Aor. soTT^v, I stood ; Peif. aan^xa, I stand ; 
Mid. larafiaL, to place one's self, to stand. 

ta^^vgog, a, or, (ta/vg) strong. 

idX^gSg, powerfully, strenuously, severely. 

taxvg, vog, tj, strength. 

^IraXcxogj 7Jy ov, Italian. 

t^OvSy vog, 6, a fish. 



VOCABULARY. 165 



K. 



KdSfxo?^ ov^ 6, Cadmus. 

xadrffiaiy Imp. Past ixadrj/xj^v^ (w^O *^ ^'^^' 

xadt^dvco^ (xadt^co^ i^co^ eSos^ a seat) to sit. 

xai^ and, also ; even. 

xaigo?^ ovj 6, a season. 

xuLCjy xavaco^ Aor. exavaa^ exrfu, to kindle, to 

set on fire ; Mid. xauadaij to burn. 
xaxia^ ag, ?/, vice, evil, cowardice. 
xaxoXoyia. ag, ?/, (xaxov, Xeyco) evil speaking, 

slander. 
xaxov^ ov, TO, an evil, evil. 
xaxo^j ?/, oV, evil, vicious, wicked, cowardly; 

Comp. xaxicov^ Sup. xaxiaiog. 
xaxcogy badly, illy, evilly. 
xaXea^ », iao^ xixhjxa^ xixXr^fiai^ to call. 
xalos, ?/, oV, beautiful, noble, honorable ; Comp. 

xaXXicov^ Sup. xaXkiaiog. 
xaXoxd/aOiUj ag, ?/, nobleness, virtue, upright- 
ness. 
xaAoJg, beautifully, well, honorably. 
xdpvco^ xufta^ xix{.trjxay Jlor. sxa/xov^ to labor, to 

be in distress. 
xoiv^ far xat av^ even if. 
xagSta^ ag, ?^, a heart. 
xagjtog, ov, 6, fruit. 
xaxa^aivco^ ^rjaofiaij ^ejirfxay xaii^rfv^ ((iacvo) 

to go down, to descend. 

xaTuxktvoy Lva^ (xXivo) to bend down, to recline. 
14 



166 VOCABULARY. 

xaiaXeLTteOf yjo^ xaraXeXsKpa^ (xaid^ Xsinco) to 

leave behind, to forsake. 
xuTaTtolsfieo^ «, ?^V«, (noXBi.iico) to subdue in war. 
xaraTLdi^fit, xajadiiao)^ Tsdeixa^ (Tidrffxc) to lay 

down, to deposite. 
xaTa^goveco, o, rjaco^ (cpgovico) to contemn, to 

despise. 
xaracpvyi^^ rjgy ?), (xaxacpsvyco^ to flee for refuge) 

a refuge. 
xareiSco, (xardj stSco) to look down, to survey, 

to behold. 
xaiT^yogsco^ S, ijacoj xairiyogrfxaj (d/ogevco) to 

accuse. 
xaTtScoPj Ear. Aor. Part, from xaiscdo. 
xdroTtigov, ov, to, a mirror. 
xsifirjhov^ ovj TO, (xsif^iaCj to lie) a burden. 
KsXatvai^ »i/, at, Celaenae. 
xeXtvco^ evaco.^ xsxeXsvxa^ to command. 
xigag^ aTog, to, a horn. 
xsgSog, eos^ to, gain. 
xstpaXjji ijs, ?/, a head. 
x^gv^^ vxog^ 6, a herald. 
KiOaigav, Svog^ 6, Cithaeron. 
xivSvvog^ ov^ 6, danger. 
KXsagxog, ov, 6, Clearchus. 
xXsLvog^ ?/, oV, (xXeog, renown) renowned, cele- 
brated. 
xXiog^ ovg^ to, renown, glory. 
xXsnxrfg^ ov, 6, (xXstitco) a thief. 
xXoTtTjj rjgy ^, theft. 



VOCABULARY. 167 

xoLvoSf Tfj 6v^ common. 

xoLvcjveco^ «, rjaoj xexoivavi^xa^ to partake, to 
share in. 

xoAttsw, daco, xsxoXaxa^ to chastise, to correct, 
to punish. 

xoXaxsLa, ag, ?), flattery. 

xoAa|, axog, 6, a flatterer. 

xof-Lij^ TfSj ?), hair. 

xoga^j axog^ 6, a raven, a crow. 

xoQif^ 7f9y ?/, a maiden. 

xoaf.iecj^ co^ ijaco^ xexoofujxa^ to arrange, to adorn. 

x6af,Log^ 01/, 6, order, harmony, ornament ; the 
orderly system of things, the world. 

xguTio, CO, 7/(76), xexgdiifxa, (xgdios) to rule, to 
command, to overcome. 

xgdiog^ eog^ to, power, force, strength. 

xgetTTcov^ superior, stronger, better ; Sup. xgd- 
Tiaxos^ strongest, best. 

xgsi.idvpvi.Uj xgEfidacj, (xgef-idco) to suspend, to 
hang up. 

xgiaig^ scog, ?/, (xgivco^ to judge) the act of judg- 
ing, judgment, a decision, a sentence. 

KgixcoVy covogj 6, Crito. 

xgoxoSsLlog^ ov, 6, a crocodile. 

Kgovog^ ov^ 6, Saturn. 

xgyjiiOy xpcoy Per/. Pass, xexgvfifiat^ ixgvcpOrfv^ 
Aor. exgv(iov^ to hide. 

xidofxai, couoLL., xrijoofiat^ to acquire ; Per/, xi- 
xryjfjLULy I possess. 

xT7J/.iay uTog, TO, (xidofiaty to acquire) a posses- 
sion. 



168 VOCABULARY. 

xTrjcftSf €os^ 9/, the act of possessing, possession. 

XTi(^T7j?^ ov, 6, {xri^o) a builder, a founder. 

xvXi^^ Lxosy i^j a cup. 

xvfjia, UToSj TO, a wave. 

xvgtog^ ovj 6, a lord, a master. 

Kvgos, ov, 6, Cyrus. 

xv(ov^ xvvos, 6, ?^, a dog. 

xSfiTf, Tfg^ 7], a village. 

xcixpoSj 7], oV, deaf, dumb. 



AaxeSai^ovLoSj ov^ a Lacedemonian. 

XaXico^ (5, ?^(>«, to talk, to speak. 

Xdkog, ov^ 6, 7^5 talkative, loquacious. 

kaixjidvco, hjipo/jtat^ etkifcpa^ etXri^ixai^ ik^cpdrfv^ 
Aor. Act. f Aa/3or, to take, to receive. 

kaijLTcdsj ddog, i^, a torch. 

lufXTtgog^ a, oV, (Xd[.i7tco, to shine) splendid, bril- 
liant. 

XavOdvco^ Xrfdo^ ksXtjOa^ Xehjo^iai^ (root Xddo^ 
XriOco) to be concealed, to escape notice ; Xav- 
Odvo as TovTo Ttotav^ I escape your notice do- 
ing this, i. e. I do this without your knowledge. 

)Jatva. 7)g^ ?^, a lioness. 

kij^co^ A6|g3, Pei^f. Pass. XeXsy^ai^ i}.e/drjv^ to 
speak, to say. 

IsL^co, yjo^ to pour, to distil ; Mid. Xei^ofxat^ to 
flow, to trickle. 

Xeino). yjOy XiXoLua^ Lett. Per/. XeXeicpa^ to leave. 

Aegvalog^ a, ov, Lernaean. 



VOCABULARY. 169 

Xevxos^ rj^ 6v^ white. 

A6631/, 0VT05, 6, a lion. 

A?/V«, |«, to stop, to cease. 

X^dri, rfs, ^y forgetfulness. ^rjOrfy Lethe, the 
river of oblivion in Hades. 

XlOoSj ovy 6, a stone. 

Xifxijv^ ivog, 6, a harbour. 

Aivos^ 017, Linus. 

loyi^ofiaiy iao^iaiy {Xoyoi) to reckon, to esti- 
mate, to consider. 

Xoyog^ ov, 6, {X^yco) speech, reason, an account. 

loinos rjj oV, (Xsinco^ to leave) what is left, rest, 
remaining ; xd 'koind^ the remaining things, the 
rest ; xov Xoltiov (sc. ;fpoVov), for the future. 

Xova^ Xovaco, Per/. Pass. Xekovfxatj to wash (par- 
ticularly the body ; to wash the hands, vlutco- 
to wash clothes, nXvvco) ; Mid. kovof^iat or 
Aovua/, to wash one's self. 

Xocpos^ ov^ 6, a summit, a hill. 

udvxLo?, OV, 6, Lycius. 

Av'xog, OV, 6, a wolf. 

AvxovQyo'iy OV, 6, Lycurgus. 

XvTiicoy 7f(y(o, Af Ai/7r?;xa, (Avtt?^), to grieve, to af- 
flict; Mid. XvjiuadaL^ to grieve, to be dis- 
tressed. 

Xvjii}, ?/g, ?/, grief, pain. 

Xv/voSy OV, 6, a lamp. 

M. 

fidXa^ 7/?, 7/, barley bread, a cake. 
14* 



170 VOCABULARY. 

[idOrffxa, arog, to, (^avOdvco, to learn) any thing 
learned, knowledge, learning. 

fidOr^atgy sag, 7^, the act of learning, learning, 
instruction. 

fjtadr^jrjg, ov, o, a learner, a scholar. 

Maia^ ag^ r], Mai a. 

MacavSgog, ovj 6, Maeander, a river in ^sia Minor. 

fxaivco^ f.iavo, fi8i.i7jva, to madden; Mid. [xaivo- 
fiat^ to be phrensied, to rave. 

[jtdxag, agog, 6, 7}, happy, blest. 

fxaxdgiog^ a, oi/, happy. 

Maxedoina, ag, r), Macedonia, 

fiaxgog, a, w, long. 

^ocAa, very much ; fxdXXov^ more. 

fjidhara, most, especially, in the highest degree. 

MavSdvij^ ^g, fj, Mandane. 

fxavddvc}, i.iadrj(yof.iat^ fxefiddi^xa^ Jlor. ^laOov, to 
learn, to understand. 

fjcavta, ag, 7^, madness. 

MavTLvua^ a?, ?/, Mantinea. 

Magdvag, ov, 6, Marsyas. 

fiadTtyoco, 6aco, (txdait^j a whip) to whip, scourge. 

^a;^?^, ?^?, 7^, a fight, a battle. 

{id^oiiaL, [xa^eaofxat and fiaxoviiat, fi£(xd/rf[,iat, 
to fight. 

[jiiyag, fxej^dXtf, fisya, great; Comp. [xst^ovy great- 
er; Sup. [xej^t(jTog, greatest. 

fjLsyUy JYeut. used adverbially , greatly. 

fjiiysdogy fog, TO, greatness. 

fiidTj, ijg, riy drunkenness. 



VOCABULARY. 171 

[isitov^ ovog, 6, 7), greater. See (leyas. 

f^ietgdxiov^ ov, to, a young man, a boy. 

/if Aag, atva f^ieXav, black. 

fisksTij, 7/g, ?/, (ueXejoicj, to exercise) a practis- 
ing, training, care. 

fisXi, LTog, TO, honey. 

fisXtaoa and ^iXixxa^ ?/5, ?/, a bee. 

liiXXa, fjLsXXyoco, to be about to do, to delay; to 
[isXXovy id liiXXovTUj that which is about to 
be, the future. 

(iif.i(po/^iaiy fisf.iipouaij to blame, to censure. 

[xiv, a particle corresponding to our indeed, to 
be sure, in constructions like the following ; 
xarrjyoQSL fjtsp iuov^ xgivtL 8i tovtov, he ac- 
cuses indeed me, but places this man on tri- 
al ; dyados fiiv^ SvaTvx)}^ 8i^ good to be sure, 
but unfortunate. 7/ is generally used with Si^ 
and indicates a contrast frequently too slight 
to be expressed in English. 

[livcjj ^evcoy (xsfuvTjxUy to remain. 

[liaog, 7/, 01/, middle in the midst. 

fisiaiSaXXco, /3aA«, (iejiXifxa, {(idXXco) to change. 

l^iszai^oXi/, fi?j ify change. 

fiSTans^iTtOj yjcoj (nifinco) to send after ; more 
common in the Mid. fieTa7isf.i7touac, to send for. 

[iSTaTcd)iLUy djjaco, zidetxa, (rtdi^fjii) to remove, 
to transfer, to change ; Mid. fxeTaztdsfiai^ to" 
change one's self. 

[isxgtg and f^t^XQ^^ until. 

(irj, not, lest ; used like the Latin ne, not for an 



172 VOCABULARY. 

absolute negative (for which ov is employed), 

but conditionally; hence used in prohibitions 

and dependent propositions ; [irj Af/f, [xtj Ail?^?, 

do not speak. 
[xrfSs, (fXTJ, 8a) neither, not even ; differs from 

ovSi as [ii\ differs from ov. 
[xi^dstg, fjcrfSsixLu, fArfSivj no one ; it differs from 

ov8ets as fiij from ov. 
[jtTfdeTtoTSy {f^iriSsy tzots) never. 
Mijdog, ov^ a Mede. 
fiTJv^ in truth, assuredly, moreover. 
fXTJTs, (fXT^j Tf) both not, neither. 
{^TJTTiQy igosy ?^, a mother. 
lilyvv^i^ fXL^cOy fisfAtj^f^^h to mingle. 
fXLxgog, a, oV, httle, small. 
Mt?,TLd8rfg, ov, 6, Miltiades. 
fiLfxTfTjjg, ov, 6, (fxtiisofiai, to imitate) an imitator. 
[iL[xv7Ju7C(o, jLivjjaco, (fxvdco) to remind; Mid* [xt- 

[xvrjaxofxai^ fivrjaofxat, fisfxyrffzat, to remember. 
fiiadvOgcoTtog, ov, 6, t^, (fxiaeo, to hate, dvdgcouog) 

a misanthrope. 
fitaico^ cS, Tjcfco^ fxsfiicirixa, to hate. 
fxtaOog, ov, 6, wages, a reward. 
fiLOoXoyog, ov, 6, tj, a hater of knowledge, a 

skeptic. 
[ivrjfjia, aiog^ ro, (fjiuda)) a memorial, a monument. 
Mvtjfxocjvvrj, rig, rj, Mnemosyne, the mother of 

the muses ; memory. 
[xohg, scarcely, with difficulty. 
fxovLfjLog^ ov, 6, ?/, (fiivo) abiding, permanent. 



VOCABULARY. 173 

fiovosy 7/, ov, alone, sole. 

[xovaa, Tfs^ ri^ a muse. 

[ivOog, oif, 6, a speech, discourse, fiction, fable. 

MvaoSj ov, 6, a Mysian. 

(.leogtUy a^, ?/, stupidity, folly. 

- iv: 

vaiy yes, certainly. 

Nd^os^ ov, 6, Naxos. 

vaog, 01/, 6, a temple. 

vavTij<5^ 01/, 6, (vai/^) a sailor. 

veavLaSj ov, 6, a youth. 

NsiXos^ 01/, 6, the Nile. 

vexgog^ oi/, 6, the dead. 

viog^ a, oi/, young, new ; ol viot^ the youths. 

vecpiXrf^ ijg^ ?^, a cloud. 

vf«g, «, 6, a temple. 

vrjaog^ ov, 6, an island. 

vLxdco, co^ ijaco^ vevixijxa^ to conquer. 

vix-q^ r^g, ?), conquest, a victory. 

vofii^co, LOO, (vofxog^ law) to establish by law ; 

to think, to believe. 
vofiog^ 01/, 6, a law. 

voog vovg^ voov vovy 6, understanding, mind. 
voaog^ 01/, 6, disease. 
vvv^ now. 
i/i/|, vvxTog^ 7]^ night. 

Ssviag^ oi/, 6, Xenias. 
Sevoxgdrrfg^ ov9, 6, Xenocrates. 



174 VOCABULARY. 

ffsvocpcov^ covTog^ 6, Xenophon. 
tSig^rig^ ov, 6, Xerxes. 
IfCTo?, 7^, 01/, (|f«) polished. 
^icpog^ SOS, TO, a sword. 
|v^/3oi;A/a, a?, ^, counsel, advice. 

O. 

6, 7^, to', the ; 6 ^ii/, the one ; 6 5f, the other, 
o^f, ?jf5f, To'5f , this, this here ; '^Se ri dxTjj eaxiv^ 

here is the shore. 
bSog, 01/, 7^, a way, a road. 
oSovs, ovTog, 6, a tooth. 
odsv^ from whence, 
of^a, I know, ^8slv, I knew; /S?/^/. a5«. Op?. 5t- 

5f 47/v, /;/ijo. Lodij Inf. slSevat^ Part. eldSs. This 

verb is the Ear. Perf. of stSo, to see. 
otxhris^ ov^ 6, (oixos) a domestic, a servant, a 

slave. 
otxaco, «, 7J(j€o^ ^xTfxa, to dwell, to inhabit. 
otxrJTog, oQog, 6, an inhabitant. 
otxca, a?, 7/, a house. 
olvos, 01/, 6, wine. 
OLOfiat contr. o^iai, olrjaofiai^ (pijdrfv^ to think, 

to suppose. 
OLdo, Fat. of (psgco. 
otog^ a, ov, qualis, correlative, of Tolog^ of what 

kind, of w^hat sort. 
oxTw, eight. 

oXiyog^ 7^, ov, little ; oXlyoi, at, a, few. 
oXXvfjLt, dAc5, oAwAf xa, to destroy ; JV/id oXXvfiac^ 



VOCABULARY. 175 

Aor. coX6fi7fv^ to perish ; Ear. Per/. oXoXa^ I 

am undone. 
oXo£^ rf^ or, whole, entire. 
"OfxrfQog^ ov, 6, Homer. 

ofxiXio^ c5, jjaco^ auiX-qxa^ {o^aXos) to be in com- 
pany with, to associate with. 
ofifia^ uTog^ to', (onrof^iat) a sight, the eye. 
ofioLog^ a, ov, similar. 
ofioicog^ similarly. 

ovsiSl^o^ lacj^ (ovstSog) to reproach. 
ovstSog^ sog^ to, reproach. 
ovofia^ uTog, ro^ a name. 
o^vg^ fTa, i/, sharp. 
07t7f^ where, how, in what manner. 
OTtXoVy ov, TO, a weapon. 
OTtcog^ (6g) in what manner, how; that, in order 

that. 
ogdo^ «, Fut. bipoi,iat, Per/. iSgaxa^ Ear. jJor. 

alSov^ to see. 
ogyij, Tjg, ?/, (cgeyco) mental impulse, passion, 

anger. 
ogyi^ofiaL^ to be angry. 
ogiyo, ^co, S(^^e;(a^ to stretch, to extend ; Mid. 

6gs2'Ofiat, (to stretch one's self) to strive after, 

to aim at. 
ogdogy r/, oi/, erect, upright, straight ; right. 
ogog, f05, TO, a mountain. 
0^, ?/, o, who, w^hich, what ; og av^ whoever; tv & 

(xgovcp), while. 
oaicog^ (ooLog) piously. 



176 VOCABULARY. 

oafjiij^ rjg^ r/^ (o^co, to smell) a smell, an odor. 
6Vo?5 rij ov, correlative of roaog, as much as, as 

great as ; oaoi^ as many as. 
o6Ti£^ rJTts^ o^TL^ whoever, v^hatever, who, what* 
orav^ (oTf, av), when, with Suhj. 
oTf, when ; ead^ ore, there is when, sometimes. 
oTt^ that, because. 
ov, ovx, ovxt not. 

0^, or, f, {from i) of him, of himself. 
0^, where. 

ovSeis^ ovdefxta^ ovSiv^ (ovds^ €ls) no one. 
ovSinoTs^ (ov8e^ noTs) never. 
ovxsTtj (ovx, €Tt) no longer. 
ovv, (used in connecting a conclusion with the 

preceding reasoning) then, therefore. 
ovnoTB^ (ov^ Ttozi) never. 
Ovgavia^ ag, 7^, Urania. 
ovgavog^ ovj 6, heaven. 
ovg^ coTog, to, an ear. 
ovTf, (ov^ Ts) neither. 
ovroij certainly not, 
ovTogj avTTi^ roi/ro, this. See § 24. 
ovTcog and ovzco^ thus. 
oq)ig^ ecog. 6, a serpent. 
oi/;oi/, 01/, to', (fi/>«, to boil) originally boiled 

food, flesh, what was eaten with bread ; suh- 

sequently^ what was used as seasoning, sauce ; 

as^ itovog oxpov xolg d/aOotg, labor seasons, 

gives a relish to, our enjoyments. 



VOCABULARY. 



177 



n. 

Ttddog^ SOS ovg^ to, {ndaxco) a passion, an affection. 

TtaiSsia, ag, ?/, (nuLg) education, discipline, train- 
ing, instruction, science. 

Ttais, TtaiSos, o^ r/, a child, a boy, a girl, a slave. 

TtdXai^ anciently, formerly. 

Udvdstaj a$, ?^, Panthea. 

TtavoTtTijg, 01/, 6, (ttcci/, onxo^at) all- seeing. 

TtaviaxoOsvj from every quarter. 

Ttavjaxov^ everywhere. 

TtavTOiog, a, ov, (Trag) of all sorts, manifold. 

TtdTZTiog, ov, 6, (ndrtnag) a grandfather. 

nagaylyvoixaL^ j^evijaofiaij yhyav7}ixai^ (jiyvoi.iaL) 
to be present, to come to. 

nagadsty^ia^ arog, to, (nagaSeixvyfjii) a pattern, 
a model, an example. 

7iagd8eL(jog, ov^ 6, a pleasure-garden, a park in 
which wild animals are kept. 

Ttagalau^dvo, hjipo/^iaL, BiXricpa^ {Xa^^dvo) to 
take to one's self, to receive what is handed 
down. 

Ttagaaxsvd^o, daco^ (axsvd^co^ axevog) to prepare, 
to provide, furnish. 

Tiagstdj ag, ?^, a cheek. 

ndgsi^a^ eaofiat, {nagd^ ecfxty to be) to be pres- 
ent ; ol TtagovTsg, those present. 

ndgsifitj (nagd, sifit, to go) to come to, to 
come forward, to pass by. 

Ttageg^ofxaty iXevaof^aL^ nageXriXvda^ C^g^ofxat) 
15 



178 VOCABULARY. 

to come to, to pass by or beyond ; Aor. na- 
gijXOov. 

Ttagixo^ i^(Oj nagicf^'^xa^ to hold near, to pre- 
sent, to furnish. 

7tagLaz7jf,Uy (Ttt^W, nagsairfxa^ (Lajrjfii) to place 
near, by, or with ; Aor. nagiajtiVj I stood near, 
by the side of ; jtageairfxay I stand near, by. 

UagvaaaoSy ov, 6, Parnassus. 

ndg^ Ttdaa^ ndv^ all, every. 

Uaaicov^ (ovosy 6, Pasion. 

nuTijg, igosy 6, a father. 

naigig, tSos, ?/, native land, country. 

Ttavcoy (jg)^ Tienavxa, to cause to cease, to cause 
to stop ; Mid. navofxat^ to stop, to cease. 

TteidcD^ ocoy nknuxa^ to persuade j itknoiQa^ to 
trust; MuL Tteido^aL^ to ^^nfide in, to yield 
to, to obey. 

IIsl6c), oog ovg^ ?^, Peilho, the goddess of per- 
suasion ; persuasion. 

netgdcoy «, occrw, nsTtetgaxa, (nslga) to try, to put 
to the proof; Mid. Ttetgdofjiat^ cofxaij to en- 
deavour, to attempt, to try. 

IleiaidaL^ cov, at, Pisidians. 

niixnco, ipco, 7ti7toi.i(pa, to send, to conduct. 

TtsvLu, ag, ?/, (nivco^ novico, to labor) poverty. 

TtivTSj five. 

TtSTtlog, ov, 6, a robe, a garment. 

7tegug%oixaij ilevOo{xaij ihjkvdaj {^gxoixai) to 
go round, to surround. 

negLxaTagg-^yvv/xCj ggrj^co {nsgt^ xaidy griyvvfii) 
to tear in pieces all around. 



VOCABULARY. 179 

TtegtkvTtogj ov, 6, ?/, (nsgi^ XvTttf) excessively 
grieved, deeply sorrowing. 

TcegiTtareo^ c3, rj<^co^ (jtegt, Ttareco) to walk about, 

Ttsgixagijg^ f og, (jisgc, xoLigco) immoderately joyful. 

nigarfg^ ov, 6, a Persian. 

nirgay ag, t^, a rock. 

Uriyaaos^ ov, b, the horse Pegasus {from nrfyrjj 
a fountain, nriydZco^ as having caused a foun- 
tain to spring on Mt. Helicon by a stroke of 
his hoof). 

TtTjy^j rjg^ tf, a fountain, a source. 

Ttrjga, a?, r/, a travelling sack, a wallet. 

Ttrjxvs^ sog, 6, an elbow, an arm, a cubit. 

TtiTcgogj a, or, sharp, bitter. 

TtLvcoj TtLOfxaLj 7i87tc)xa, Aor. eTtLov, to drink. 

TtLTtTo, 7tsaovfi( ^ TtBTtToxa^ Aor. eTteaov^ to fall, 
to befall, to happen. 

TTLaxevcoy atOj TtsTtiarevxa^ (Ttstdo) to believe, to 
trust. 

TttdTog^ 7/, oV, faithful, trustworthy. 

HXdicovj ovog, 6, Plato. 

nXslaTog^ Sup. of noXvg^ most. 

nXijOogj sag, to, (nXrjdco) a multitude. 

nXrjv, except, ivith Gen. 

nXrjgrfg, aog^ 6, ?^, {nXaog^ nXico) full. 

TiXijgoco, e5, Saeoj TtSTtkTJgaxa, to fill. 

nXoLovj 01/, TO, (nXsco^ to sail) a ship. 

7tXov6tog^ a, ov, rich. 

nXovTecoj a, rjao)^ TtSTiXovrrfxay to be rich. 

TcXovTog^ OV, 6, (TrAofTo?, /rom ttoAv? and I'to?, 
an abundant year) wealth. 



130 VOCABULARr. 

IlkovTcov, covog, 6, Pluto, God of the infernal 

regions. 
noiico, jjaoj TtSTtoirfxa^ to do, to make ; ev notsiVj 

to do well, to benefit ; Mid. noLov^at^ to 

make to one's self. 
nou^ixa, uTos, to, a thing made, a work> a poem. 
7tonfT7J9^ ovy 6, a rpaker, a poet, 
TtOLog, a, 01/, of what sort, what. 
Ttoi/xijv^ ivos, 6, a shepherd. 
TColifjiLog, a, or, (^Ttoksfxog) hostile ; oi noksfxioi^j 

the enemy. 
TtoksfiLxog, ij, dv, warlike.^ 
7t6?^€fjLog, ov, 6, w^ar. 

710 kis^ eaSy 7^5 (noXvg^ many) a city, a state* 
noXXdxig^ often, many times. 
itoXvdvdgcoTtog, ov, 6, ?^, (noXvg, dvOgconog) pop- 
ulous. 
TtoXvfiadTJg, eog^ 6, ?/, (noXvg, fjiavOdvco) learned. 
Ttokyg, noXkr]^ noXv^ much, many. 
TtovrfQog, d^ov, (tcovbco). bad, malignant, depraved. 
Tiovog, ov^ 6, (nivco) w^ork, labor. 
IIo(j8l8Sv^ covog, 6, Neptune, God of the sea^ 
TtoTUfiog^ ov^ 6, a river. 
TtoTS^ when. 

TTOTf, once, at some time> at any time> ever. 
Ttovg^ 7to86g, 6, a foot. 
ngdy^ia, arog, to, a thing done, a deed ; a thing, 

an affair. 
ngdaacx and ngdijo, ^co, nenQd^^a, to act, to 

manage,, to be engaged in, to do ; ^v ngdz- 

xecvy to be prosperous^ 



VOCABULARY. 181 

nqknti^ {nqkiKo) it is becoming, it is befitting, 
Ttgsa^vs, vog, and sos^ Poet for ngsa^vTris, old, 

an old man. 
7igs6^vTsgog^ a, gi/, {Comp. of ngea^vg) older, 

an elder, and jigea^vTaxoSj ij^ ov, Sup. oldest. 
Ttgtv, before. 
ngodycy^ d^co^ {ngo^ dyo) to lead forward, to go 

forward, to precede. 
7tg6j3aTov^ 01/, to, a sheep. 
Ttgodidcofii^ Scjoco, dsStDxaj Sedofiaty (Sx^o^t) to 

give up, to betray. 
TtgoSoirfg^ oi/, 6, a betrayer, a traitor. 
TtgoXi/coj |«, Perf Pass. ngoXsksyfiac, {Xs/co) 

to speak before, to foretell. 
Tigoaeg^ofiaCy iXevao{xai^ iXrjlvday Aoi\ TtgoctijX' 

dov^ to come to, to approach. 
TtgoaXafA^dvcOy XjjyjofzaL, eiXricpoL^ Aoi\ ngoaeXa' 

^01/, (Xafx^dvcj) to take in addition, to take 

to one's aid. 
Tzgdzsgog^ a, ov^ {Comp. from ngo) prior^ earlier. 
Ttgo^jJTrfgy ov, 6^ (^^go^ 9W^^) ^ foreteller, a 

prophet. 
TtgcSrog^ ?y, ov, (Sup., of ngo) first ; to itgmov^ at 

first ; TtgcoTov^ first, adverbially, 
nirfvogj rj, 6v^ (TtjijvaCy 7zhof,iaL) winged*^ 
Ilvdayogagj ov, Pythagoras. 
TivXri^ Tfg^ Tf^ a gate. 
nvvddvofjiaL, TtsvijOfxaCy neTXvajjiai^ to inquire, to 

learn by inquiry ; jlor. iTtvOo/^iJiv. 
Ttvgj Ttygog, to, fire. 

15* 



182 



VOCABULARV. 



TtoTtoTe, ever, at any time ; ov ncDuoxSy not at 

any time, never. 
71(0(5 'y how? in what manner? 
7i(os enclitic^ somehow ; G>8e jtogy somehow so. 



^ddiog, a, ovj Comp. ^adtcov and ^dov^ Sup. ^0,81- 

OTog-and ^aaxog^ easy; adv. ^aov^ more easily. 
^adv/xog, ov, (^aStog^ dvfiog) careless, slothful. 
^soy g€v<jofiaL^ to flow ; ^or. Pass, ig^vrfv, hence 

Perf. Jtct. ig^vi^xa. 
^eco, stgijxa^ dgrf^tai, to speak, to say; Fut. igS^ 

from siQco^ Aor. unov. 
gijrog, ogog^ 6, (gio) a speaker, an orator, a 

rhetorician. 
gi^a, rig, ?/, a root. 
p«p^, ?^?, ?^, {goco, govvvfxt) bodily vigor, strength. 

2:. 

JJdgSetg, bcov, ax, Sardis. 

atavTov, rjg, of thyself, of thee. 

aeXrivi}, rfg^ ij, the moon. 

arfi^iatvco, avS^ Aor. iarifirjva, (arjua, a sign) to 

point out, to indicate. 
Oiydco^ «, r\a(o, aeaiyrpca, to be silent. 
oiyjj, rjg, r), (atydo) silence. 
UixeXia, a^, if, Sicily. 
aLOTtda, (5, rjao^ asataTtrjxa, to be silent. 
axelog, ao$, to, a leg. 
axrivi], ijg, if, a tent. 



1 



VOCABULARY. 183 

CTcrivoo^ eoy 6cfeo^ icfxrjvaxa^ to pitch a tent, to 
inhabit, to dwell. 

cfxid^ ag, t^, a shadow. 

aocfta^ a?5 ?/, (aocpog) wisdom, skill in any art 
or science. 

oo(piOT}jg^ ovj 6, ((jo^os) a wise man, a sophist. 

aocpos, 7J^ ov, wise, skilful, accomphshed. 

dTtdco^ c5, accj, to draw. 

cnovdalos^ a, oi/, (oTtovSrjj zeal) zealous, dili- 
gent, good. 

cidais, SOS, 7^, (aidcj, idTrjfit) a placing, a stand- 
ing, a rising ; a party, faction, sedition. 

mavgos^ ov, 6, (Jairffxi^ to place) a pale fixed 
upright ; a stake, a cross. 

arevos, tJ, ov, (^azevco) narrow. 

OTBgycD^ ^coj eaisg/a and eaxogya^ to love, prop- 
erly with natural affection ; to be satisfied. 

(?Tooc, a?, 7^, a porch, a gallery. 

arolos, ov, 6, ((jtsXIco) a sending, an armament, 
an equipment. 

(TTo^ta, aro?, to, a mouth. 

aigaTavfia, aro?, to, ((TTpaTog) an army. 

(jTgaT7jy6g^ ov, 6, (aTpaTog, a;/Gj) a general,, a 
commander. 

ajgaTLaiifg^ ov, 6, a soldier. 

av, aov, thou. 

ovyxaXico^ (5, f(;c5, avyxixXrfxay (xaXio) to call 
together. 

Zvivveatg, sos^ 6, Syennesis. 

avXkaii^dvo^ Xrixpo^dL^ avvaiXiicpa^ ovvaXa^ov 



184 VOCABULARY. 

(Xa[xl3dvco) to take together with, to aid, to 

seize upon. 
6vXki/(o, ^co, (jvv€cXo%ay avvstXsyfjLac (avv, Xkya) 

to collect^ to bring together^ 
avfijSaLvco, ^rjaofxac^ avfi[3il3rjxaj (jwijirfv, (^aivco) 

to come together^ to happen ;. avftjiaivei^ it 

befalls^ it happens, 
avfKpogd, a?, ?^, (^av^q)s§co) a bringing together, 

an event, a calamity. 
avvaycovL'Co(ioLt^ laofxaL, (dyovi^ofjiat) to contend 

together with, to aid. 
avvava^odoy «, T^'cca, ^sjiorjxa^ ((jvvy oivd^ ^odo} 

to cry out together with^ 
ovvavLOTjjfit, (avv^ dvd^ iOTrffxc) OTijato, eairfxa^ to 

place up together with ; Mid. to rise up with* 
cfvvaTtodvrjaxa)^ davovfiat^ zaOvrfxay to die to- 
gether with. 
avveidoj dvvoida^ to be conscious otVtoknowj 

Flit. avvsiSyjao from avvsideo. 
avvijOsta^ ag^ ri^ (ovv and ?|0og, custom) inter- 
course, association. 
avvvofjiog^ ovj 6, t^, {avv^ vifxcoj to feed) pasturing 

together. 
2!vgaxov(jtog, a, ov, Syracusan. 
dvoxLoSy ov, 6, 7], ((Ti/V, axid, a shadow) shady. 
av/v6s, 7^5 oV, dense, thick, much. 
ciq)atgost87JSy iog^ ovg, {(j(patga, a ball, a sphere) 

spherical. 
6(paXBg6g^ a, oV, (a(pdXXco^ to cause to reel, to 

deceive) deceitful. 



VOCABULARY. 185 

dcpdrTco (same as acpdlo)^ !«, lacpayiiai^ to slaugh- 
ter, to stab. 

2cpiy^^ yyos^ ri^ Sphinx. 

a^oXd'Coj doco, ((j^oXij, leisure) to be at leisure, 
to have leisure for any thing; hence, to devote 
one's time to, to attend to, to study. 

(yw^cj, (Tw, aeacjxa, aiacofxat and ae(Jcoaf.iai^ (ocosj 
safe) to save, to deliver. 

2J(oxgdT7^g, eog ovg, 6, Socrates. 

2JcoxgaTtx6sj 6, the Socratic philosopher. 

(j(5|ua, aios, roy a body. 

aoTiJQy ijgogj 6, (a6^o) a preserver, a deliverer. 

6oxrigta, ag, ^, the act of preserving, safety, 
deUverance. 

aocpgoveco^ rjacoy (aacpgcov) to be of sound mind, 
to be sober. 

acocpgoovvif^ Tfs, >/, (a6q)gcov) soundness of mind, 
sobriety, discretion. 

aacpgav^ ovog^ 6, ?/, (acjg, V9V^) of sound mind, 
sober, temperate, discreet ; Comp. acocpgovi- 
axegos, Sup. aacpgoviaTajos. 



rdXavTov, ov, to, (ikda) a pair of scales ; weight, 
that which is weighed, a talent. 

TdviaXosy ov, 6, Tantalus. 

Tdgiagog, ov, 6, Tartarus, the lowest and dark- 
est part of the infernal regions. 

rdaaco^ ^co^ T£Ta;^a, lizayfxaiy to station, to arrange. 

TQLvgoS'i QVy 6, a bull. 



186 VOCABULARY. 

Td/Laxos^ ??, ovj Sup. and 

raxicov and ddaaov or ddiTov, Comp. from 

TOL^v^^ f ta, V, swift ; cog jdxiOTa^ as quickly as 
possible, immediately. 

TeL^oSj SOS 01/?, TO, a wall. 

TBxvov, ov, TO, (tlxico^ to bring forth) a child. 

reXsvTdco^ r\(jco^ tbtsXsvtyixol^ (rslog, end) to end, 
to finish ; with ellipsis of ^iov^ to die. 

Tslsvirj, jjs^ rj^ an end, death. 

ziXos^ sag ovs, to, an end, accomplishment. 

TBfivo^ TSfxS^ Thfirixa^ Tezfirifxai^ Aor. Act. ha- 
fjiov^ to cut. 

rigrfv^ eiva^ rsgsv^ (rsgo, Tsigco. to rub) rubbed, 
made smooth ; hence tender, soft, delicate. 

TsgyjLs, €cos^ ^, (rigitco^ to delight) delight, satis- 
faction. 

TsX^rf^ 7^?, 7^, (probably from Tfxo, tlxto^ akin 
to Tsv/o) art. 

TidrifjiCy djjaco^ Tsdeixa^ (dio) to place, to put. 

TLXTco, Tf|G7 commouly Ts^ofxai^ jixoxa^ {rsxa) to 
bring forth, to produce. 

TLfidoy «, 7J(jco, TSTifxrixay TsiLuijfiatj (Tifirj) to es- 
timate, to value, to honor. 

TifiT], ijsy ?J, (tlo) estimation, value, price, honor. 

TtfjLLog^ a, ov^ honorable, esteemed. 

Ttfiogico, riao^ tbt iiicogrixa^ {xtficogog^ ^^^f^v) ^^ ^'^> 
to assist, to punish ; Mid. TLfxogeofiat^ to aid 
one's self against any one, to avenge one's 
self, to punish. 

TLfjLcogia^ ag, ?/, succour, vengeance, punishment. 



VOCABULARY. 187 

XLvo^ Tidcoj riilxaj TETt^at^ {tlcd) to estimate, to 
value ; to pay the price of any thing, to ex- 
piate, to pay a penalty. 

Ttg, Tt, Ttvog, any one, some one, a certain one. 

r/g, Tt, TLvog, who? what? 

TLOLS', sag, 7^5 (rio) estimation, valuation ; corri' 
monly punishment, revenge. 

Ttaaa(pegvrjg, sog ovg, 6, Tissaphernes, a Persian 
satrap. 

TOLOVTogj TotavTT], TOLovTo aucl TOLovTov^ (a length- 
ened form of Totog) such, such like, 

ToX/xdcOy ijaco^ iSTokfxifxa^ (roA^a, jXdco) to bear, 
to endure, to dare. 

TOTtog^ ovj 6, a place, a site. 

igdne'CoL^ ?^g, 17, a table. 

jgeTico, yjo^ jsTgocpa^ to turn ; Mid. TginoixaLj to 
turn one's self, to turn intrans. 

jgecpcj^ Ogeifjco^ zsTgocpa, zidga^^at^ idgi(pdrfv and 
hgdcpijv^ to nourish. 

jgi/Oj Sgafjiovfiuiy Sedgd/xifxa^ eSgafxov, (^Sgifio} 
to run. 

jgi^coj xpco, xUglcpa, T8TgLf.ifxat, to rub, to wear 
away, to beat, to spend ; elliptically, to spend 
time, to follow any pursuit. 

jgtijgijg, sog ovg, 7^, (xgig^ dgcoj to fit) an Adj. used 
ivith ellipsis of vavg, a ship with three benches 
of oars on each side, a trireme, a galley. 

igczog, 7^, ov, the third. 

rgoTiog^ ov, 6, (xginco) a turning, a mode, man- 
ner, turn of mind, disposition. 



188 VOCABULARY. 

TVTtoSj ovj 6, (rvTtTco) a blow, a mark made by 
a blow ; hence^ a mark, impression, form, fig- 
ure ; an image, model, pattern. 

rvTtTco^ ipoy rhvcpa, rsrvfifxac^ to strike, to beat. 

TvgavvLS, iSos^ r/, (rvgavvoi) arbitrary power, 
sovereignty, dominion. 

rvcpXos, 7J^ oV, blind. 

rv/rf, r^Sy ?^, (tv%(o) chance, fortune. 

r. 

vyuia^ a?, i^, (vj^njs) health, soundness. 

vdga^ a?, ?^, a hydra, a water-serpent. 

vdog, aios, to, (vw, to make wet, to rain) water. 

vto'g, ov, 6, a son. 

vTtsgfisyedyjs, eog, 6, 7^, (yneg^ iisyedos) exceed- 
ingly great. 

VTtsgogdo, (5, oipofiat, Sfifxai^ vTtsgetSov, (vnig^ 
ogdco) to look over, to overlook, to despise. 

vTtvos^ ov, 6, sleep. 

vTtTLos, a, ov, (yito) bent backwards, laid on the 
back. 

varsgatog^ a, or, (yaxsgog) on the following day. 

vaisgov^ afterwards. 

vxp7f}.6sj Tf, oV, (vyjog. height) high, lofty. 

vxpos^ fog, TO, height. 

(patvco, (pavS, necpcuyxa^ Aor. Icpriva^ to show, to 
make to appear ; Mid. (patvofiat^ to appear ; 
Ear. Perf. necpiiva^ I have appeared. 



VOCABULARY. 189 

(pavsQog, a, oV, manifest, plain. 

(pag^iaxov^ ov, to, a medicine, a drug, a poison. 

(pavkog^ 71^ ovy bad, worthless, vile. 

(psQco^ OLOco, Ivqvoya^ ivrjve/i^tai, Aor. ijvsyxa and 

ijvsyxov^ to bear, to bring ; Mid. (pigoiiai^ to 

bear one's self, to rush on; (pige, come on. 
(psvyco^ (psv^ouatj nicpevya^ Aor. ecpvyov, to flee. 
(prjf^rfy ?/g, ?/, (cpy^/^u) a saying, report, reputation. 
(prffiLj cprioo^ Imp. ecpj^v loith Aor. signification^ 

to say, declare, to affirm. 
(pOovecOy coy ijacoy (cpdovosy envy) to envy. 
q)tXdvdgco7t09y oi/, 6, ?), (cpikoSy oivdgcoTtos) that 

loves mankind, benevolent, philanthropic. 
(ptXagyvgta, as^ 7/, ((piloSy dgyvgos) love of 

money, avarice. 
cpiXecoy 6j ijaco^ TCscpiXijxay to love. 
(piXiay a?, ?/, attachment, love, friendship. 
0ih7i7iogy 01/, 6, Philip. 
(fLXof.iadi\gy iosj 6, ?/, (cpikogy f.iavddvo) fond of 

learning. 
(piXoTtovicOy 6j 7Jcf(0j ((pilogy novas) to love labor, 

to be industrious. 
(piloTtovcay as, ?^, love of labor, diligence. 
(pilonovogy oi/, 6, ?^, fond of labor, industrious, 

diligent. 
(piXoSy ov, 6, a friend. 
q)LXooo(piay ag, ?), love of wisdom or of an art, 

philosophy. 
(piloaocposy ovy 6, (q)Uog, aocpia) a lover of wis- 
dom, a philosopher. 
16 



190 VOCABULARY. 

ipiXoxpvxog, ov, 6, 71^ {(piXos^ W^XV) loving life, 
timid. 

(pXvagio, Sy Tjcfco^ {(pXvagog^ (pXvo^ to boil over, 
to bubble) to prate, to talk idly. 

(po^soy Sy -^cKOy 71 8 (f ojStix u , ((pojSos) to terrify ; 
JVIid. (po^soiiaiy ov/xai^ to fear. 

(pojSog, ovy 6, ((ps^coy q)e[3ofxat) fear. 

0oLVLxriy Tfs^ ?), Phoenicia. 

0oiVL^y ixosy 6, a Phoenician; the palm tree; 
the fruit of the palm, the date. 

fpoLidoy 6y ijacoy to go back and forth, to fre- 
quent ; often to go to school. 

06gycoSy ovy 6, Phorcus. 

(pg6vri6iSy ao£y ?/, ((pgovico) understanding, intel- 
ligence, prudence. 

€pg6viiio9y ovy by 7/, {fpgriVj mind) intelligent, pru- 
dent. 

(pvXax^y 7)9y iiy {(pvXdaaco) guarding, watching, a 
guard, a prison. 

(pyXaxTcoy ^co^ nscpvXa/ay to watch, to guard ; 
Mid. (pyXaxToixaty to be on one's guard, to 
beware of. 

(pvatSy ecoSy iiy ((pvo) the act of producing, gen- 
eration, nature. 

yvo, (pv(j(Oy Tticpvxay to produce ; Mid. (pvofxaiy 
to spring into existence, to grow ; necpvxa 
and ecpvvyio be by nature, to be constituted. 

0coxLoVy ovosy 6, Phocion. 

(fcjvrjy ijsy rjy a sound, a voice. 

(pSsy (fcoToSy TO, light. 



VOCABULARY. 191 



XOLigOy ^^aigr^cjOj xexdgijxa, xs/oigrffiat^ to rejoice. 
XaXsnog, ?/, oV, hard, difficult. 

XagLsts^ saaa^ ev, (%oigts) graceful, charming, 

elegant, agreeable. 
xdgLs, tTog, ?], (xaigc)) that which gives delight, 

grace, beauty, a favor. 
Xscg^ XSigog, rj, a hand. 
j^dgiCTog^ 7^, ov, Sitp. of xaxos, worst. 
X^^^^og, a, ov, (XV^^ ^ goose) pertaining to a 

goose. 
Xi'Tav, 6vog^ 6, an under garment, a tunic. 
/gdofxat^ 6{xai, (XQ^^) XQ^^^l^^^^ ^^yfP^i^^^ to 

use. 

Xg^^^9 a^9 ^h (X9^^) i^ggJ? use. 

;fp£«i/, TO, (indeclinable) necessity, fate, destiny. 

Xg7J^ Impers. it behooves, it is necessary, Lat. 

oportet. 
XgyJl^oLj axog^ to, (xg^^) a thing that is used, a 

thing ; PL xgij/xaia^ possessions, treasures. 
;^^?/(76uog, 7^, ov, useful. 
Xgovog^ ov, 6, time. 

j(gvaiov, ov, to, and xg^^^^^ ^^5 ^, gold. 
Xgvo6[,ta},Xog, ov, 6, 7), {/gvoog, fxakXog) having 

a golden fleece. 
^coXog, r/, oV, lame. 
X^g^-i ^^9 ^5 a region, a space. 
^(ogso^ e5, TJaon xexcog-qxa, to have room, to hold, 

to give room for, to retire, to go. 



192 



VOCABULARY. 



W^XVy n^9 V^ life, the soul. 

SI. 

m^ as. 

€i(jTB^ so as, so that. 



ERRATA. 

Page 28, line 1, for § 61, read § 65. 
" ** " 2, « § 75, « § 79. 



■Mi. - 



LIBRARY OF 



CONGRESS 




003 035 529 5 






t-V":- 



